H7 Adjustable Speed Drive Operation Manual - inverter & Plc€¦ · H7 Adjustable Speed Drive...

efesotomasyon.com -Toshiba inverter,drive,servo,plc

H7 Adjustable Speed Drive Operation Manual

Document Number: 52854-002

Date: August, 2005

efes

Typewriter

Toshiba H7 inverter user manual


IntroductionCongratulations on the purchase of the new H7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive (ASD). The H7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive is a solid-state AC drive that features True Torque Control2. TIC’s Vector Control Algorithm enables the motor to develop high starting torque and provide compensation for motor slip, which results in smooth, quick starts and highly efficient operation. The H7 uses digitally-controlled pulse width modulation. The programmable functions may be accessed via the easy-to-use menu or via the Direct Access Numbers (see page 60). This feature, combined with Toshiba’s high-performance software, delivers unparalleled motor control and reliability.

The H7 is a very powerful tool, yet surprisingly simple to operate. The user-friendly Electronic Operator Interface (EOI) of the H7 has an easy-to-read 240 x 64 pixel graphical LCD screen. The EOI provides easy access to the many monitoring and programming features of the H7.

The motor control software is menu-driven, which allows for easy access to the motor control parameters and quick changes when required.

To maximize the abilities of your new H7, a working familiarity with this manual will be required. This manual has been prepared for the H7 ASD installer, user, and maintenance personnel. This manual may also be used as a reference guide or for training. With this in mind, use this manual to develop a system familiarity before attempting to install or operate the device.

Important NoticeThe instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all details or variations in equipment types, nor may it provide for every possible contingency concerning the installation, operation, or maintenance of this equipment. Should additional information be required contact your Toshiba representative.

The contents of this manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment, or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Toshiba International Corporation. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Toshiba International Corporation and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.

Any electrical or mechanical modifications to this equipment without prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation will void all warranties and may void the UL/CUL listing or other safety certifications. Unauthorized modifications may also result in a safety hazard or equipment damage.

Misuse of this equipment could result in injury and equipment damage. In no event will Toshiba Corporation be responsible or liable for direct, indirect, special, or consequential damage or injury that may result from the misuse of this equipment.

(800) 231-1412 TOSHIBA tic.toshiba.com


About This Manual

This manual was written by the Toshiba Technical Publications Group. This group is tasked with providing technical documentation for the H7 Adjustable Speed Drive. Every effort has been made to provide accurate and concise information to you, our customer.

At Toshiba we’re continuously searching for better ways to meet the constantly changing needs of our customers. Email your comments, questions, or concerns about this publication to the [email protected].

This Manual’s Purpose and ScopeThis manual provides information that will assist the qualified installer in the safe installation, setup, operation, and disposal of the H7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive. The information provided in this manual is applicable to the H7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive only.

This operation manual provides information on the various features and functions of this powerful cost-saving device, including

• Installation,

• System operation,

• Configuration and menu options, and

• Mechanical and electrical specifications.

Included is a section on general safety instructions that describe the warning labels and symbols that are used throughout the manual. Read the manual completely before installing, operating, performing maintenance, or disposing of this equipment.

This manual and the accompanying drawings should be considered a permanent part of the equipment and should be readily available for reference and review. Dimensions shown in the manual are in metric and/or the English equivalent.

Because of our commitment to continuous improvement, Toshiba International Corporation reserves the right, without prior notice, to update information, make product changes, or to discontinue any product or service identified in this publication.

Toshiba International Corporation (TIC) shall not be liable for direct, indirect, special, or consequential damages resulting from the use of the information contained within this manual.

TOSHIBA is a registered trademark of the Toshiba Corporation. All other product or trade references appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective owners.

This manual is copyrighted. No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation.

© Copyright 2005 Toshiba International Corporation.

All rights reserved.

Printed in the U.S.A.


mailto: [email protected]

http://www.efesotomasyon.com/toshiba/


Contacting Toshiba’s Customer Support Center

Toshiba’s Customer Support Center can be contacted to obtain help in resolving any H7 Adjustable Speed Drive system problem that you may experience or to provide application information.

The center is open from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. (CST), Monday through Friday. The Support Center’s toll free number is US (800) 231-1412/Fax (713) 466-8773 — Canada (800) 527-1204.

You may also contact Toshiba by writing to:

Toshiba International Corporation

13131 West Little York Road

Houston, Texas 77041-9990

Attn: ASD Product Manager.

For further information on Toshiba’s products and services, please visit our website at www.tic.toshiba.com.

TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATIONH7 Adjustable Speed Drive

Please complete the Warranty Card supplied with the ASD and return it to Toshiba by prepaid mail. This will activate the 12 month warranty from the date of installation; but, shall not exceed 18 months from the shipping date.

Complete the following information and retain for your records.

Model Number: ______________________________________________________________________

Serial Number:______________________________________________________________________

Project Number (if applicable):__________________________________________________________

Date of Installation: __________________________________________________________________

Inspected By:______________________________________________________________________

Name of Application:_________________________________________________________________


www.tic.toshiba.com

Table of Contents

H7 ASD


General Safety Information .................................................................................................... 1

Installation Precautions .......................................................................................................... 5

System Integration Precautions ............................................................................................. 8

Operational and Maintenance Precautions ......................................................................... 10

CE Compliance Requirements ............................................................................................. 11EMC Installation Guidelines ............................................................................................ 11

General EMC Guidelines for Consideration ............................................................. 11CE Compliant Installation Guidelines ...................................................................... 11

Motor Characteristics ........................................................................................................... 14Motor Autotuning ............................................................................................................. 14Pulse Width Modulation Operation .................................................................................. 14Low Speed Operation ....................................................................................................... 14Overload Protection Adjustment ...................................................................................... 14Operation Above 60 Hz .................................................................................................... 15Power Factor Correction .................................................................................................. 15Light Load Conditions ..................................................................................................... 15Motor/Load Combinations ............................................................................................... 15Load-produced Negative Torque ...................................................................................... 16Motor Braking .................................................................................................................. 16

H7 ASD Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 17Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................................................... 17H7 ASD Capacity ............................................................................................................. 17Using Vector Control ........................................................................................................ 17Local/Remote Operation .................................................................................................. 17

Installation and Connections ................................................................................................ 18Installation Notes .............................................................................................................. 18Mounting the ASD ........................................................................................................... 19Connecting the ASD ......................................................................................................... 20

System Grounding ..................................................................................................... 20Power Connections ................................................................................................... 21Lead Length Specifications ....................................................................................... 22Startup and Test ........................................................................................................ 22

I/O and Control ................................................................................................................. 23Terminal Descriptions ............................................................................................... 24

H7 ASD Control ............................................................................................................... 27CNU1/1A and CNU2/2A Pinout ............................................................................... 28CN3 Pinout ................................................................................................................ 28CN7 Pinout ................................................................................................................ 29I/O Circuit Configurations ........................................................................................ 30

Typical Connection Diagram ........................................................................................... 31

Electronic Operator Interface .............................................................................................. 32EOI Features ..................................................................................................................... 32EOI Operation .................................................................................................................. 33

Operation Manual i

ii


System Operation .................................................................................................................. 34Initial Setup ...................................................................................................................... 34Operation (Local) ............................................................................................................. 34Default Setting Changes ................................................................................................... 35

Startup Wizard Requirements ............................................................................................. 36

Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control ................................................................. 39Command Control (F003) ................................................................................................ 39Frequency Control (F004) ................................................................................................ 40

Command and Frequency Control Selections ........................................................... 41Override Operation ........................................................................................................... 42

Command and Frequency-Control Override Hierarchy ............................................ 42Command Control Selections ................................................................................... 42Frequency Control Selections ................................................................................... 43

System Configuration and Menu Options ........................................................................... 44Root Menus ...................................................................................................................... 44

Frequency Command Mode ...................................................................................... 44Monitor Mode ........................................................................................................... 46Program Mode ........................................................................................................... 48

Direct Access Parameter Information ................................................................................. 60Direct Access Parameters/Numbers ................................................................................. 60

Alarms, Trips, and Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 181Alarms and Trips ............................................................................................................ 181Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 182User Notification Codes ................................................................................................. 184Trips/Faults ..................................................................................................................... 184

Viewing Trip Information ....................................................................................... 188Clearing a Trip ........................................................................................................ 189

Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information ................................................... 190Enclosure Dimensions/Weight ................................................................................ 190Conduit Plate Information ....................................................................................... 195Conduit Extender Box (option) ............................................................................... 197

H7 ASD Adapter Mounting Plates ..................................................................................... 198ASD Adapter Mounting Plate Dimensions .................................................................... 199

EOI Remote Mounting ........................................................................................................ 202Remote EOI Required Hardware ............................................................................ 202EOI Installation Precautions ................................................................................... 202EOI Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT .................................................... 203EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT ................................................. 203

Current/Voltage Specifications ........................................................................................... 205

Cable/Terminal Specifications ............................................................................................ 208

Link Reactor Information .................................................................................................. 211

H7 ASD Optional Devices ................................................................................................... 212

H7 ASD Spare Parts Listing ............................................................................................... 213

H7 ASD Operation Manual


General Safety InformationDO NOT attempt to install, operate, maintain or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the product safety information and directions that are contained in this manual.

Safety Alert SymbolThe Safety Alert Symbol indicates that a potential personal injury hazard exists. The symbol is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an exclamation mark.

Signal WordsListed below are the signal words that are used throughout this manual followed by their descriptions and associated symbols. When the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION are used in this manual they will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully adhered to.

The word DANGER preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that an imminently hazardous situation exists that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury to personnel.

The word WARNING preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.

The word CAUTION preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

The word CAUTION without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation exists which, if not avoided, may result in equipment and property damage.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

H7 ASD Operation Manual 1


Special SymbolsTo identify special hazards, other symbols may appear in conjunction with the DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION signal words. These symbols indicate areas that require special and/or strict adherence to the procedures to prevent serious injury to personnel or death.

Electrical Hazard SymbolA symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from electrical shock or burn. It is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing a lightning bolt.

Explosion Hazard SymbolA symbol which indicates a hazard of injury from exploding parts. It is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an explosion image.

Equipment Warning LabelsDO NOT attempt to install, operate, perform maintenance, or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the product labels and user directions that are contained in this manual.

Shown below are examples of safety labels that may be found attached to the equipment. DO NOT remove or cover any of the labels. If the labels are damaged or if additional labels are required, contact your Toshiba sales representative for additional labels.

Labels attached to the equipment are there to provide useful information or to indicate an imminently hazardous situation that may result in serious injury, severe property and equipment damage, or death if the instructions are not followed.

Figure 1. Examples of labels that may be found on the equipment.

CAUTIONExcessive Loading of Operating ShaftCan Prevent Contactor From ClosingProperly Resulting In Major Damage.

Do Not Use Contactor Shaft To DriveAccessories Such As Mechanical InterlocksWhich Require More Than 5 Kgf-cm OfTorque To Operate.

! DANGERDO NOT OPEN THIS DOOR WHILE THE UNIT IS RUNNING.THIS DOOR IS INTERLOCKED WITH ASD OPERATION.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT.Capacitors Are Charged. WaitAt Least 5 Minutes Before Entry.

Check For Charged VoltageTo Dissipate To A Safe LevelBefore Opening The Equipment.

!

DANGERDO NOT REMOVE, DESTROY, OR COVER THIS LABEL.

READ THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY BEFOREINSTALLING, OPERATING, OR SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGECan Cause Severe Injury, Death, Explosion, Fire, Or Property Damage.

Only Qualified Personnel Should Be PermittedTo Operarate or Service This Equipment.Disconnect And Lockout Primary And ControlCircuit Power Before Servicing.

Keep All Panels And Covers Securely In Place.

Never Defeat, Modify, Or Bypass Safety Interlocks.Foreign Voltage May Be Present At InterfaceTerminals. Isolate Before Performing ServiceOr Repairs.Unauthorized Modifications To This EquipmentWill Void The Warranty.

!DANGERDO NOT REMOVE, DESTROY, OR COVER THIS LABEL.READ THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY BEFORE ENTERING THIS COMPARTMENT.

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE Behind These Panels.Contact With Energized Main Bus Will CauseSevere Injury, Death, Fire, Explosion, OrProperty Damage.

Turn Off And Lockout Primary AndControl Circuit Power Before OpeningThese Panels.Qualified Operators Only.

!

2 H7 ASD Operation Manual


Qualified Personnel

Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only. A Qualified Person is one that has the skills and knowledge relating to the construction, installation, operation, and maintenance of the electrical equipment and has received safety training on the hazards involved (Refer to the latest edition of NFPA 70E for additional safety requirements).

Qualified Personnel shall:

• Have carefully read the entire operation manual.

• Be familiar with the construction and function of the ASD, the equipment being driven, and the hazards involved.

• Able to recognize and properly address hazards associated with the application of motor-driven equipment.

• Be trained and authorized to safely energize, de-energize, ground, lockout/tagout circuits and equipment, and clear faults in accordance with established safety practices.

• Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes, rubber gloves, hard hats, safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established safety practices.

• Be trained in rendering first aid.

For further information on workplace safety visit www.osha.gov.

Equipment Inspection

• Upon receipt of the equipment inspect the packaging and equipment for shipping damage.

• Carefully unpack the equipment and check for parts that were damaged during shipping, missing parts, or concealed damage. If any discrepancies are discovered, it should be noted with the carrier prior to accepting the shipment, if possible. File a claim with the carrier if necessary and immediately notify your Toshiba sales representative.

• DO NOT install or energize equipment that has been damaged. Damaged equipment may fail during operation resulting in equipment damage or personal injury.

• Check to see that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the nameplate conform to the order specifications.

• Modification of this equipment is dangerous and must not be performed except by factory trained representatives. When modifications are required contact your Toshiba sales representative.

• Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment.

• Keep the equipment in an upright position.

• Contact your Toshiba sales representative to report discrepancies or for assistance if required.



Handling and Storage• Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ASD; including properly sizing up the load, getting

assistance, and using a forklift if required.

• Store in a well-ventilated covered location and preferably in the original carton if the equipment will not be used upon receipt.

• Store in a cool, clean, and dry location. Avoid storage locations with extreme temperatures, rapid temperature changes, high humidity, moisture, dust, corrosive gases, or metal particles.

• The storage temperature range of the H7 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10 to 40° C).

• Do not store the unit in places that are exposed to outside weather conditions (i.e., wind, rain, snow, etc.).

• Store in an upright position.

DisposalNever dispose of electrical components via incineration. Contact your state environmental agency for details on disposal of electrical components and packaging in your area.



Installation Precautions

Location and Ambient Requirements• The Toshiba ASD is intended for permanent installations only.

• Installation should conform to the 2005 National Electrical Code — Article 110 (NEC) (Requirements For Electrical Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.

• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible, has adequate personnel working space, and adequate illumination for adjustment, inspection, and maintenance of the equipment (refer to 2005 NEC Article 110-13).

• A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately surrounding the electrical system.

• Do Not mount the ASD in a location that would produce catastrophic results if it were to fall from its mounting location (equipment damage or injury).

• Do Not mount the ASD in a location that would allow it to be exposed to flammable chemicals or gases, water, solvents, or other fluids.

• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, fibers, steel particles, explosive/corrosive mists or gases, or sources of electrical noise are present.

• The installation location shall not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• Allow proper clearance spaces for installation. Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. Refer to the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 18 for further information on ventilation requirements.

• The ambient operating temperature range of the H7 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10 to 40° C).

• See the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 18 for additional information on installing the drive.

Mounting Requirements• Only Qualified Personnel should install this equipment.

• Install the unit in a secure and upright position in a well-ventilated area.

• A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately surrounding the electrical system at the place where maintenance operations are to be performed.

• As a minimum, the installation of the equipment should conform to the NEC Article 110 Requirements For Electrical Installations, OSHA, as well as any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.

• Installation practices should conform to the latest revision of NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

• It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to ensure that the unit is installed into an enclosure that will protect personnel against electric shock.



Conductor Routing and Grounding

• Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power, output power, and control circuits and each shall have its own ground cable.

• A separate ground cable should be run inside the conduit with the input power, output power, and and control circuits.

• DO NOT connect control terminal strip return marked CC to earth ground.

• Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help reduce electrical noise.

• It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to provide proper grounding and branch circuit protection in accordance with the 2005 NEC and any applicable local codes.

T h e M e t a l O f C o n d u i t I s N o t A n A c c e p t a b l e G r o u n d .

Power Connections

C o n ta c t W i t h E n e r g i z e d W i r in g W i l l C a u s e S e v e r e I n j u r y O r D e a t h .

• Turn off, lockout, and tagout all power sources before proceeding to connect the power wiring to the equipment.

• After ensuring that all power sources are turned off and isolated in accordance with established lockout/tagout procedures, connect three-phase power source wiring of the correct voltage to the correct input terminals and connect the output terminals to a motor of the correct voltage and type for the application (refer to NEC Article 300 – Wiring Methods and Article 310 – Conductors For General Wiring). Size the branch circuit conductors in accordance with NEC Table 310.16.

• If multiple conductors that are smaller than the recommended sizes are used in parallel for the input or output power, each branch of the parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit with other parallel sets (i.e., place U1, V1, and W1 in one conduit and U2, V2, and W2 in another) (refer to NEC Article 300.20 and Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or more power conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2005 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors on page 70-142).

• Ensure that the 3-phase input power is Not connected to the output of the ASD. This will damage the ASD and may cause injury to personnel.

• Do not install the ASD if it is damaged or if it is missing any component(s).

• Do Not connect resistors across terminals PA – PC or PO – PC. This may cause a fire.

• Ensure the correct phase sequence and the desired direction of motor rotation in the Bypass mode (if applicable).

• Turn the power on only after attaching and/or securing the front cover.

WARNING

DANGER



Protection• Ensure that primary protection exists for the input wiring to the equipment. This protection must be

able to interrupt the available fault current from the power line. The equipment may or may not be equipped with an input disconnect (option).

• All cable entry openings must be sealed to reduce the risk of entry by vermin and to allow for maximum cooling efficiency.

• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.

• If using multiple motors provide separate overload protection for each motor and use V/f control.

• External dynamic braking resistors must be thermally protected.

• It is the responsibility of the person installing the ASD or the electrical maintenance personnel to setup the Emergency Off braking system of the ASD. The function of the Emergency Off braking function is to remove output power from the drive in the event of an emergency. A supplemental braking system may also be engaged in the event of an emergency. For further information on braking systems, see DC Injection Braking Start Frequency on pg. 111 and Dynamic Braking Enable on pg. 119.

Note: A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD. Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone.




System Integration PrecautionsThe following precautions are provided as general guidelines for the setup of the ASD within the system.

• The Toshiba ASD is a general-purpose product. It is a system component only and the system design should take this into consideration. Please contact your Toshiba sales representative for application-specific information or for training support.

• The Toshiba ASD is part of a larger system and the safe operation of the ASD will depend on observing certain precautions and performing proper system integration.

• A detailed system analysis and job safety analysis should be performed by the systems designer and/or systems integrator before the installation of the ASD component. Contact your Toshiba sales representative for options availability and for application-specific system integration information if required.

Personnel Protection• Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only.

• A thorough understanding of the ASD will be required before the installation, operation, or maintenance of the ASD.

• Rotating machinery and live conductors can be hazardous and shall not come into contact with humans. Personnel should be protected from all rotating machinery and electrical hazards at all times.

• Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards may fail or be defeated by the purposeful or inadvertent actions of workers. Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards are to be inspected (and tested where possible) at installation and periodically after installation for potential hazardous conditions.

• Do not allow personnel near rotating machinery. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the machinery.

• Do not allow personnel near electrical conductors. Human contact with electrical conductors can be fatal. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the hazard.

• Personal protection equipment shall be provided and used to protect employees from any hazards inherent to system operation.


System Setup Requirements• When using the ASD as an integral part of a larger system, it is the responsibility of the ASD

installer or maintenance personnel to ensure that there is a fail-safe in place, i.e., an arrangement designed to switch the system to a safe condition if there is a fault or failure.

• System safety features should be employed and designed into the integrated system in a manner such that system operation, even in the event of system failure, will not cause harm or result in personnel injury or system damage (i.e., E-Off, Auto-Restart settings, System Interlocks, etc.).

WARNING



• The programming setup and system configuration of the ASD may allow it to start the motor unexpectedly. A familiarity with the Auto-restart settings are a requirement to use this product.

• Improperly designed or improperly installed system interlocks may render the motor unable to start or stop on command.

• The failure of external or ancillary components may cause intermittent system operation, i.e., the system may start the motor without warning.

• There may be thermal or physical properties, or ancillary devices integrated into the overall system that may allow for the ASD to start the motor without warning. Signs at the equipment installation must be posted to this effect.

• If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) is used between the ASD and the load, it should be interlocked to halt the ASD before the secondary contact opens. If the output contactor is used for bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the ASD output terminals (U, V, W).

• Power factor improvement capacitors or surge absorbers must not be installed on the output of the ASD.

• Use of the built-in system protective features is highly recommended (i.e., E-Off, Overload Protection, etc.).

• The operating controls and system status indicators should be clearly readable and positioned where the operator can see them without obstruction.

• Additional warnings and notifications shall be posted at the equipment installation location as deemed required by Qualified Personnel.




Operational and Maintenance Precautions

• Turn off, lockout, and tagout the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections before inspecting or servicing the drive, or opening the door of the enclosure.

• Turn off, lockout, and tagout the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections before proceeding to disconnect or connect the power wiring to the equipment.

• The capacitors of the ASD maintain a residual charge for a period of time after turning the ASD off. The required time for each ASD typeform is indicated with a cabinet label and a Charge LED. Wait for at least the minimum time indicated on the enclosure-mounted label and ensure that the Charge LED has gone out before opening the door of the ASD once the ASD power has been turned off.

• Turn the power on only after attaching (or closing) the front cover and Do Not remove the front cover of the ASD when the power is on.

• Do Not attempt to disassemble, modify, or repair the ASD. Call your Toshiba sales representative for repair information.

• Do not place any objects inside of the ASD.

• If the ASD should emit smoke or an unusual odor or sound, turn the power off immediately.

• The heat sink and other components may become extremely hot to the touch. Allow the unit to cool before coming in contact with these items.

• Remove power from the ASD during extended periods of non-use.

• The system should be inspected periodically for damaged or improperly functioning parts, cleanliness, and to ensure that the connectors are tightened securely.

• Ensure that the Run functions (F, R, Preset Speed, etc.) of the ASD are off before performing a Reset. The post-reset settings may allow the ASD to start unexpectedly.

• Retry or Reset settings may allow the motor to start unexpectedly. Warnings to this effect should be clearly posted near the ASD and motor.

• In the event of a power failure, the motor may restart after power is restored.


DO NOT install, operate, perform maintenance, or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the product warnings and user directions. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage, operator injury, or loss of life.

Service Life InformationPart Name Service Life Remarks

Large Capacity Electrolytic Capacitor 5 YearsWhen not used for long periods, charge semi-annually.

Cooling Fan 26,000 Hours

CN Connectors 100 Connects/Disconnects

On-board Relays 500,000 Actuations

WARNING



CE Compliance RequirementsIn addition to the local and regional safety requirements, this section describes additional criteria that must be met to qualify for European Conformity (CE) certification. All relevant apparatus placed on the European market is required to comply to the European Community directive on electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The following instructions provide a means of compliance for the 7-series of ASDs. A Technical Construction File (TFC) indicates the rationale used to declare compliance and is on file at Toshiba International Corporation, Houston, Texas U.S.A.

EMC Installation GuidelinesAll systems placed on the European market are required to comply with the European Community directive regarding electromagnet compatibility (EMC). Toshiba ensures that all systems deployed in the European market have been screened and are in 100% compliance with the following standards:

• Radiated Interference: EN 55011 Group 1 Class A

• Mains Interference: EN 55011 Group 1 Class A

• Radiated Susceptibility: IEC 801-3 1984

• Conducted RFI Susceptibility: prEN55101-4 (prIEC801-6) Doc 90/30270

• Electrostatic Discharge: IEC801-2 1991

• Electrical Fast Transient: IEC 801-4 1988

• Surge: IEC1000-4-5 1995 2 KV line-to-line, 4 KV line-to-earth

• Voltage Interruption: IEC 1000-4-11

General EMC Guidelines for Consideration• Input filters of the appropriate rating shall be used.

• Proper grounding is a requirement.

• Grounds shall be kept to the minimum length to accomplish the connection.

• Grounds shall have low RF impedance.

• A central ground shall employed in a complex system.

• Paint or corrosion can hamper good grounding; remove as required.

• Keep control and power cabling separated. Minimize exposed (unscreened) cable.

• Use 3600 screened connections where possible.

CE Compliant Installation GuidelinesASDs should be installed in accordance with the following guidelines.

1. Filtering — An input filter shall be used with the ASD. A Schaffner FN258 series input filter of the appropriate rating shall be mounted next to the ASD.

2. Mechanical — The ASD and the associated equipment shall be mounted on a flat metallic backplane. A minimum space of 5 cm (2 inches) shall be between the ASD and the filter to allow for ventilation. The filter output cable is to be connected from the bottom of the filter to the ASD



power input and is to be the minimum length required for a connection. See Table 1 on page 13 for filter selection assistance.

Units received as an Open Chassis shall not be placed into operation until being placed into an approved enclosure that will protect personnel against electrical shock.

Opening and closing of enclosures or barriers should be possible only with the use of a key or a tool.

3. Cabling — The power, filter, and motor cables shall be of the appropriate current rating. The cables shall be connected in accordance with the guidelines of the manufacturer and the applicable local and national agencies. A 4-core screened cable (such as RS 379-384) is to be used for the power and earth connections to minimize RF emissions. Control cabling must be screened using P/N RS 367-347 or a similar component.

4. Grounding — The mains (input) ground shall be connected at the ground terminal provided on the filter. The filter and motor shall be grounded at the ground terminals provided in the ASD.

5. Screening — The mains (input) screen is to be connected to the metallic back-plane at the filter; remove any finish coating as required. The screen over the filter output cables, the motor cable screen, and the control wire screens must be connected to the ASD case using glands or conduit connectors. The motor cable screen shall be connected to the motor case. When using a braking resistor, the cabling between the resistor and ASD shall also be screened. This screen shall connect to both the ASD enclosure and the resistor enclosure.

6. Where residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only RCD of type B is allowed on the supply side of this Electronic Equipment (EE). Otherwise, another protective measure shall be applied, such as separation of the EE from the environment by double or reinforced insulation, or isolation of the EE and the supply system by a transformer.

See the H7 Filter Selection on pg. 13 for the recommended input filters for a given typeform.



Table 1. Filter selection table.

H7 Filter Selection Table

230V VT130H7U4110BFN258-30

VT130H7U2010B FN258-7 VT130H7U4160B

VT130H7U2015B

FN258-16

VT130H7U4220B FN258-42

VT130H7U2025B VT130H7U4270BFN258-55

VT130H7U2035B VT130H7U4330B

VT130H7U2055BFN258-30

VT130H7U4400B FN258-75

VT130H7U2080B VT130H7U4500BFN258-100

VT130H7U2110B FN258-42 VT130H7U4600B

VT130H7U2160B FN258-75 VT130H7U4750B FN258-130

VT130H7U2220BFN258-100

VT130H7U410KB FN258-180

VT130H7U2270B VT130H7U412KBFS5236-300

VT130H7U2330B FN258-130 VT130H7U415KB

460V VT130H7U420KB

FS5236-500VT130H7U4015B

FN258-7

VT130H7U425KB

VT130H7U4025B VT130H7U430KB

VT130H7U4035B 600V

VT130H7U4055BFN258-16

VT130H7U6015B

FN258-7VT130H7U4080B VT130H7U6025B

VT130H7U4110BFN258-30

VT130H7U6035B

VT130H7U4160B VT130H7U6055B

FN258-16VT130H7U4220B FN258-42 VT130H7U6080B

VT130H7U4270BFN258-55

VT130H7U6110B

VT130H7U4330B VT130H7U6160B FN258-30

VT130H7U4400B FN258-75 VT130H7U6220BFN258-42

VT130H7U4500BFN258-100

VT130H7U6270B

VT130H7U4600B VT130H7U6330BFN258-55

VT130H7U4750B FN258-130 VT130H7U6400B

VT130H7U410KB FN258-180 VT130H7U6500B FN258-75

VT130H7U412KBFS5236-300

VT130H7U6600BFN258-100

VT130H7U415KB VT130H7U6750B

VT130H7U420KB

FS5236-500

VT130H7U610KB FN258-130

VT130H7U425KB VT130H7U612KBFS5236-180

VT130H7U430KB VT130H7U615KB

VT130H7U4015B

FN258-7

VT130H7U620KB FS5236-300

VT130H7U4025B VT130H7U625KBFS5236-500

VT130H7U4035B VT130H7U630KB

VT130H7U4055BFN258-16

VT130H7U4080B



Motor CharacteristicsListed below are some variable speed AC motor control concepts with which the user of the H7 Adjustable Speed Drive should become familiar.

Motor AutotuningMotor production methods may cause minor differences in the motor operation. The negative effects of these differences may be minimized by using the Autotune feature of the H7 ASD. Autotuning is a function of the H7 ASD that measures several parameters of the connected motor and places these readings in a stored table. The software uses the information in the table to help optimize the response of the H7 ASD to application-specific load and operational requirements. The Autotuning function may be enabled for automatic tuning, configured manually at F400, or disabled.

The measured parameters include the rotor resistance, the stator resistance, the required excitation inductance, rotational inertia values, and leakage inductance values.

The H7 ASD is also equipped with a factory-loaded table of motor parameters that fit several different types of motors. To use this function, disable Autotune and select a motor type at F413.

Pulse Width Modulation OperationThe H7 ASD uses a sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control system. The output current waveform generated by the H7 ASD approaches that of a perfect sine wave; however, the output waveform is slightly distorted. For this reason, the motor may produce more heat, noise, and vibration when operated by an H7 ASD, rather than directly from commercial power.

Low Speed OperationOperating a general-purpose motor at lower speeds may cause a decrease in the cooling ability of the motor. Reducing the torque requirement of the motor at lower speeds will decrease the generated heat at lower speeds.

When the motor is to be operated at low speed (less than 50% of full speed) and at the rated torque continuously, a Toshiba VF motor (designed for use in conjunction with an H7 ASD) is recommended. When the H7 ASD is used with a VF motor, the VF Motor overload protection setting must be enabled (see Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overload ⇒ V/f Motor Enable/Disable).

Overload Protection AdjustmentThe H7 ASD software monitors the output current of the system and determines when an overload condition occurs. The overload current level is a percentage of the rated system current. This function protects the motor from overload.

The default setting for the overload detection circuit is set to the maximum rated current of the H7 ASD at the factory. This setting will have to be adjusted to match the rating of the motor with which the H7 ASD is to be used. To change the overload reference level, see Electronic Thermal Protection #1 on pg. 161.



Operation Above 60 HzA motor produces more noise and vibration when it is operated at frequencies above 60 Hz. Also, when operating a motor above 60 Hz, the rated limit of the motor or its bearings may be exceeded; this may void the motor warranty.

Contact the motor manufacturer for additional information before operating the motor above 60 Hz.

Power Factor CorrectionDO NOT connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the output of the H7 ASD.

If the H7 ASD is used with a motor that is equipped with a capacitor for power factor correction, remove the capacitor from the motor.

Connecting either of these devices to the output of the H7 ASD may cause the H7 ASD to malfunction and trip, or the output device may cause an over-current condition resulting in damage to the device or the H7 ASD.

Light Load ConditionsWhen a motor is operated under a continuous light load (i.e., at a load of less than 50% of its rated capacity) or it drives a load which produces a very small amount of inertia, it may become unstable and produce abnormal vibration or trips because of an over-current condition. In such a case, the carrier frequency may be lowered to compensate for this undesirable condition (see Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Carrier Frequency).

Note: For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.

Note: See F300 for more information on setting the carrier frequency for normal operation and for setting the carrier frequency above the derate threshold.

Motor/Load CombinationsWhen the H7 ASD is used in combination with one of the following motors or loads, it may result in unstable operation.

• A motor with a rated capacity that exceeds the motor capacity recommended for the H7 ASD.

• An explosion-proof motor.

When using the H7 ASD with an explosion-proof motor or other special motor types, lower the carrier frequency to stabilize the operation. DO NOT set the carrier frequency below 2.2 kHz if operating the system in the vector control mode.

Note: For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.

• If the motor that is coupled to a load that has a large backlash or a reciprocating load, use one of the following procedures to stabilize its operation.

• Adjust the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration setting,

• If in the Vector control mode, adjust the response time, or

• Switch to the Constant Torque control mode.



Load-produced Negative TorqueWhen the H7 ASD is used with a load that produces negative torque (an overhauling load), the over-voltage or over-current protective functions of the H7 ASD may cause nuisance tripping.

To minimize the undesirable effects of negative torque the dynamic braking system may be used if so equipped. The dynamic braking system converts the regenerated energy into heat that is dissipated using a braking resistor. The braking resistor must be suitably matched to the load. Dynamic braking is also effective in reducing the DC bus voltage during a momentary over-voltage condition.

If under extreme conditions the dynamic braking system or a component of this system were to fail, the dynamic braking resistor may experience an extended over-current condition. The DBR circuit was designed to dissipate excessive amounts of heat and if the extended over-current condition were allowed to exceed the circuit parameters, this condition could result in a fire hazard.

To combat this condition, the 3-phase input may be connected using contactors that are configured to open in the event of an extended DBR over-current condition or an internal circuit failure. Using a thermal sensor and/or overload protection as the 3-phase input contactor drive signal, the contactors will open and remove the 3-phase input power in the event of an extended DBR over-current or system over-voltage condition.

Motor BrakingThe motor may continue to rotate and coast to a stop after being shut off due to the inertia of the load. If an immediate stop is required, a braking system should be used. The two most common types of motor braking systems used with the H7 ASD are DC Injection Braking and Dynamic Braking.

For further information on braking systems, see DC Injection Braking on pg. 111 and Dynamic Braking Enable on pg. 119.



H7 ASD Characteristics

Overcurrent ProtectionEach H7 ASD model was designed for a specified operating power range. The H7 ASD will incur a trip if the design specifications are exceeded.

However, the H7 ASD may be operated at 120% of the specified output-current range for a limited amount of time as indicated in the section titled Current/Voltage Specifications on pg. 205. Also, the Overcurrent Stall Level may be adjusted to help with nuisance over-current trips (see F601).

When using the H7 ASD for an application that controls a motor which is rated significantly less than the maximum current rating of the H7 ASD, the over-current limit (Thermal Overload Protection) setting will have to be changed to match the application. For further information on this parameter, see Electronic Thermal Protection #1.

H7 ASD CapacityThe H7 ASD must not be used with a motor that has a significantly larger capacity, even if the motor is operated under a small load. An H7 ASD being used in this way will be susceptible to a high-output peak current which may result in nuisance tripping.

Do not apply a level of input voltage to an H7 ASD that is beyond that which the H7 ASD is rated. The input voltage may be stepped down when required with the use of a step-down transformer or some other type of voltage reduction system.

Using Vector ControlUsing Vector Control enables the system to produce very high torque over the entire operating range even at extremely low speeds. Vector Control may be used with or without feedback. However, using feedback increases the speed accuracy for applications requiring precise speed control. Enabling the Automatic Energy Savings further increases the efficiency of the H7 ASD while maintaining its robust performance.

Vector Control is not capable of operating multiple motors connected in parallel.

See F015 on pg. 65 for further information on using Vector Control.

Local/Remote OperationWhile running in the Local mode at a non-zero speed, if the RJ45 connector is removed from the EOI and then reinserted, the H7 ASD remains in the Local mode even though the Local LED is off (press Run to illuminate the Local LED). The H7 ASD output remains at the frequency of the Frequency Command field at the time of the disconnect so long as the connector is disconnected.

Once reinserted, the reference frequency that was loaded into the EEPROM (not RAM) before the disconnect will be the frequency to which the H7 ASD output will return.

To prevent this condition, before disconnecting the RJ45 connector ensure that the H7 ASD is off.



Installation and ConnectionsThe H7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive may be set up initially by performing a few simple configuration settings. To operate properly, the ASD must be securely mounted and connected to a power source (3-phase AC input at the L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T terminals). The control terminals of the ASD may be used by connecting the terminals of the Control Terminal Strip to the proper sensors or signal input sources (see the section titled I/O and Control on pg. 23).

Note: The optional ASD-Multicom boards may be used to expand the I/O functionality of the ASD. See the section titled H7 ASD Optional Devices on pg. 212 for further information on the available options.

The output terminals of the ASD (T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W) must be connected to the motor that is to be controlled (see Figure 18 on pg. 31).

As a minimum, the installation of the ASD shall conform to Article 110 of the 2005 NEC, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements, and to any other local and regional industry codes and standards.

Upon initial system powerup, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. The Startup Wizard assists the user with the initial configuration of the H7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive. See the section titled Initial Setup on pg. 34 for additional information on the Startup Wizard.

Installation NotesWhen a brake-equipped motor is connected to the ASD, it is possible that the brake may not release at startup because of insufficient voltage. To avoid this, Do Not connect the brake or the brake contactor to the output of the ASD.

If an output contactor is used for bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the output terminals of the ASD (T1/U, T2/V, or T3/W).

If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) is used between the output of the ASD and the motor, it should be interlocked such that the ST – CC connection is disconnected before the output contactor is opened.

Do Not open and then close a secondary magnetic contactor between the ASD and the motor unless the ASD is off and the motor is not rotating.

Note: Re-application of power via a secondary contact while the ASD is on or while the motor is still turning may cause ASD damage.

On some devices the ST-to-CC connection is further enhanced by the operation of the MS1 AUX relay circuit. The MS1 AUX relay circuit is normally open and closes the ST-to-CC connection (via ST1) only after normal system power is available. The MS1 AUX relay circuit prohibits the ST-to-CC connection in the event that the MS1 contactor fails to close during start up or if MS1 opens while the ASD is running. For the 230 volt ASD this feature is available on the 30 HP system, on the 460 volt ASD this feature is available on the 75 HP and above systems, and on the 600 volt ASD it is available on the 60 HP and above systems.

Figure 2. ST activation using the MS1 AUX circuit configuration.



The ASD input voltage should remain within 10% of the specified input voltage range. Input voltages approaching the upper or lower limit settings may require that the overvoltage and undervoltage stall protection level parameters, F626 and F629, be adjusted. Voltages outside of the permissible tolerance should be avoided.

The frequency of the input power should be ±2 Hz of the specified input frequency.

Do not use an ASD with a motor that has a power rating that is higher than the rated output of the ASD.

The ASD is designed to operate NEMA B motors. Consult with your sales representative before using the ASD for special applications such as with an explosion-proof motor or applications with a piston load.

Do Not apply commercial power to the output terminals T1/U, T2/V, or T3/W.

Disconnect the ASD from the motor before megging or applying a bypass voltage to the motor.

Interface problems may occur when an ASD is used in conjunction with some types of process controllers. Signal isolation may be required to prevent controller and/or ASD malfunction (contact your Toshiba sales representative or the process controller manufacturer for additional information about compatibility and signal isolation).

Use caution when setting the output frequency. Over speeding a motor decreases its ability to deliver torque and may result in damage to the motor and/or the driven equipment.

All H7 ASDs are equipped with internal DC bus fuses. However, not all H7 ASDs are equipped with internal primary power input fuses (HP dependent). When connecting two or more drives that have no internal fuse to the same power line as shown in Figure 3, it will be necessary to select a circuit-breaking configuration that will ensure that if a short circuit occurs in ASD 1, only MCCB2 trips, not MCCB1. If it is not feasible to use this configuration, insert a fuse between MCCB2 and ASD 1.

Mounting the ASD

Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the mounting holes on the rear of the ASD. When replacing an H3 ASD with an H7 ASD, see H7 ASD Adapter Mounting Plates on pg. 198 for a listing of the optional H3-to-H7 Adapter Mounting Plates

The ambient temperature rating for the H7 ASD is from 14 to 104° F (-10 to 40° C). The process of converting AC to DC, and then back to AC produces heat. During normal ASD operation, up to 5% of the input energy to the ASD may be dissipated as heat. If installing the ASD in a cabinet, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.

Figure 3. Circuit breaker configuration.

CAUTION



Do Not operate the ASD with the enclosure door open.

When installing multiple ASDs, ensure that there is a clearance space of at least 8 inches (20 cm) from the top and the bottom of adjacent units. There should be at least 2 inches (5 cm) on either side of adjacent units. For the models below 50 HP the top and bottom clearance specifications may be reduced to 4 inches (10 cm). This space ensures that adequate ventilation is provided (see the section titled Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information on pg. 190 for additional information on mounting space requirements).

Note: Ensure that the ventilation openings are not obstructed.

ASDs produce high-frequency noise — steps must be taken during installation to avoid the negative effects of noise. Listed below are some examples of measures that will help to combat noise problems.

• Separate the input and output power conductors of the main circuit. Do not install the input and output wires in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.

• Do not install the input or output power conductors of the main circuit and the wires of the control circuit in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.

• Use shielded wires or twisted wires for the control circuits.

• Ensure that the grounding terminals (G/E) of the ASD are securely connected to ground.

• Connect a surge suppressor to every electromagnetic contactor and every relay installed near the ASD.

• Install noise filters as required.

Connecting the ASD

Refer to the section titled Installation Precautions on pg. 5 and the section titled Lead Length Specifications on

pg. 22 before attempting to connect the ASD and the motor to electrical power.

System Grounding

Proper grounding helps to prevent electrical shock and to reduce electrical noise. The ASD is designed to be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the 2005 NEC or Section 10/Part One of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).

The grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with Article 250-122 of the NEC or Part One-Table 6 of the CEC.

Note: The metal of conduit is not an acceptable ground.

The input, output, and control lines of the system shall be run in separate metal conduits and each shall have its own ground conductor.

DANGER



Power Connections

L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T are the 3-phase input supply terminals for the ASD. The ASD may be operated

from a single-phase supply. When operating using a single-phase supply, use the L1 and L3 terminals.

T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W are the output terminals of the ASD that connect to the motor.

An inductor may be connected across terminals PA and PO to provide additional filtering. When not

used, a jumper is connected across these terminals (see Figure 18 on pg. 31).

Connect the input and output power lines of the ASD as shown in Figure 4.

Note: In the event that the motor rotates in the wrong direction when powered up, reverse

any two of the three ASD output power leads connected to the motor.

Figure 4. ASD/Motor connection diagram.

Connect the 3-phase input power to the input terminals of the ASD at L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T. Connect

the output of the ASD to the motor from terminals T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W. The input and output conductors and terminal lugs used shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in the section titled Cable/Terminal Specifications on pg. 208.

If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use separate conduits, each parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit with other parallel sets (i.e., place U1, V1, and W1 in one conduit and U2, V2, and W2 in another) (refer to NEC

Article 300.20 and Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or more power conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2005 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors).

Note: National and local codes should be referenced when running more than three

conductors in the same conduit.

Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or fuse between the 3-phase power source and the ASD in

accordance with the fault current setting of the ASD and 2005 NEC Article 430.

For 600 volt ASDs, the 15 HP or less ASDs (P/N VT130H7U6015B – 6160B) require a class-J fuse rated at 600 Volts/30 A.

DANGER

CAUTION



A phase-shifting transformer (or other means) must be supplied by the user when configured for 12-pulse operation.

External fuses are required on the ASDs listed below when configured for 12-pulse operation.

VT130H7U2750B(DR)VT130H7U210KB(DR)VT130H7U415KB(DR)VT130H7U420KB(DR)VT130H7U612KB(DR)VT130H7U615KB(DR)VT130H7U620KB(DR)

Use either the Ferraz Shawmut Semiconductor fuse (P/N A70QS200) and fuse block P234C, or the Toshiba ASD-FUSEKIT-12P. The Toshiba kit includes the required fuses and the mounting hardware for the fuses.

Lead Length SpecificationsAdhere to the NEC and any local codes during the installation of ASD/Motor systems. Excessive lead lengths may adversely effect the performance of the motor. Special cables are not required. Lead lengths from the ASD to the motor in excess of those listed in Table 2 may require filters to be added to the output of the ASD. Table 2 lists the suggested maximum lead lengths for the listed motor voltages.

Note: Contact Toshiba for application assistance when using lead lengths in excess of those listed. Exceeding the peak voltage rating or the allowable thermal rise time of the motor insulation will reduce the life expectancy of the motor. For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except when operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.

Startup and TestPerform the following checks before turning on the unit:

• L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T are connected to the 3-phase input power.

• T1/U, T2/V, and T3/W are connected to the motor.

• The 3-phase input voltage is within the specified tolerance.

• There are no shorts and all grounds are secured.

Table 2.

ModelPWM Carrier Frequency

NEMA MG-1-1998 Section IV Part 31

Compliant Motors2

230 Volt All 1000 feet

460 Volt< 5 kHz 600 feet

≥ 5 kHz 300 feet

600 Volt< 5 kHz 200 feet

≥ 5 kHz 100 feet



I/O and ControlThe ASD can be controlled by several input types and combinations thereof, as well as operate within a wide range of output frequency and voltage levels. This section discusses the ASD control methods and supported I/O functions.

The Control Terminal Strip PCB (P/N 48570) supports discrete and analog I/O functions and is shown in Figure 6 on pg. 26. Table 3 lists the names, the default settings, and the descriptions of the input and output terminals of the Control Terminal Strip PCB.

Note: To use the input control lines of the Control Terminal Strip the Command Mode setting must be set to Use Control Terminal Strip (Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip).

Figure 18 on pg. 31 shows the basic connection diagram for the H7 ASD system.

Table 3. Control Terminal Strip default assignment terminal names and functions.

Default Term.

SettingInput/Output

Default Function(also see Terminal Descriptions on pg. 24)

Circuit Config.

ST Discrete InputStandby (jumper to CC to operate the unit) — Multifunctional programmable discrete input (see Installation Notes on pg. 18 for further information on this terminal).

Figure 8 on pg. 30.

RES Discrete Input Reset — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.

F Discrete Input Forward — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.

R Discrete Input Reverse — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.

S1 Discrete Input Preset Speed 1 — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.



S4 Discrete Input Emergency Off — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.

RR Analog InputRR — Multifunction programmable analog input (0.0 to 10 volt input — 0 to 80 Hz output). Reference CC.

Figure 9 on pg. 30.

RX Analog InputRX — Multifunctional programmable analog input (-10 to +10 VDC input — -80 to +80 Hz output). Reference CC.

Figure 10 on pg. 30.

II Analog InputII — Multifunctional programmable analog input (4 [0] to 20 mADC input — 0 to 80 Hz output) (see Figure 6 on pg. 26 for the location of the II terminal). Reference CC. Figure 11 on pg. 30.

VI Analog InputVI — Multifunctional programmable analog input (0 to 10 VDC input — 0 to 80 Hz output). Reference CC.

P24 DC Output 24 VDC @ 50 mA output. Figure 12 on pg. 30.

PP DC Output PP — 10.0 VDC voltage source for the external potentiometer. Figure 13 on pg. 30.

OUT1 Discrete Output Low Frequency — Multifunctional programmable discrete output. Figure 14 on pg. 30.

OUT2 Discrete Output Reach Frequency — Multifunctional programmable discrete output.

FP OutputFrequency Pulse — an output pulse train that has a frequency which is based on the output frequency of the ASD.

Figure 15 on pg. 30.

AM Output Produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal (see Table 7 on page 62).

Figure 16 on pg. 30FM Output

FLC Output Fault relay (common).

Figure 17 on pg. 30.FLB Output Fault relay (N.C.).

FLA Output Fault relay (N.O.).

CC — Control common (Do Not connect to Earth Gnd).

Discrete Input Terminals ⇒ Connect to CC to activate.Analog Input Terminals reference CC.



Terminal Descriptions

Note: The programmable terminal assignments may be accessed and changed from their default settings as mapped on pg. 48 or via the Direct Access method: Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ applicable parameter number. See the section titled Program Mode on pg. 48 for the applicable Direct Access parameter numbers. For further information on terminal assignments and default setting changes, see the section titled Output Terminal Functions on pg. 50 and CHANGED FROM DEFAULT on pg. 48.

ST — The default setting for this terminal is ST. The function of this input as ST is a Standby mode controller (system is in Standby when on). As the default setting, this terminal must be connected to CC for normal operation. If not connected to CC, Off is displayed on the LCD screen. This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 77 (see F113).

RES — The default setting for this terminal is RES. The function of this input as RES is a system Reset. A momentary connection to CC resets the ASD and any fault indications from the display. This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 77 (see F114). Reset is effective when faulted only. If not faulted this terminal is ignored.

F — The default setting for this terminal is F. The function of this input as F is Forward Run. A connection to CC runs the motor in the Forward direction when it is on. This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 77 (see F111).

R — The default setting for this terminal is R. The function of this input as R is Reverse Run. A connection to CC runs the motor in the Reverse direction when it is on. This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 77 (see F112).

S1 — The default setting for this terminal is S1. The function of this input as S1 is to run the motor at Preset Speed #1 (see Preset Speed #1 on pg. 67) when it is on. This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 77 (see F115).



S4 — The default setting for this terminal is Emergency Off (normally closed). The function of this input as Emergency Off is to remove power from the output of the ASD and may apply a supplemental braking system using the method selected at F603. This input terminal may be programmed to any 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on page 77 (see F118).

RR — The default function assigned to this terminal is to carry out the Frequency Mode #1 setting. The RR terminal accepts a 0 – 10 VDC input signal that controls the function assigned to this terminal. This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor. It may also be used to regulate (limit) the speed or torque of the motor. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application-specific suitability (see F210 – F213).

RX — The RX terminal accepts a ±10 VDC input signal that controls the function assigned to this terminal. This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed, torque, or direction of the motor. It may also be used to regulate (limit) the speed or torque of the motor. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application-specific suitability (see F216 – F219).



II — The function of the II input is to receive a 4 – 20 mA input signal that controls a 0 – 80 Hz output. This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and may not be used when using the VI input. Also, the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted (see F201 – F204).

VI — The function of the VI input terminal is to receive a 0 – 10 VDC input signal that controls a 0 – 80 Hz output. This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and may not be used when using the II input. Also, the gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted (see F201 – F204).

P24 — +24 VDC @ 50 mA power supply for customer use.

PP — The function of output PP is to provide a 10 VDC output that may be divided using a potentiometer. The tapped voltage is applied to the RR input to provide manual control of the RR programmed function.

OUT1 — The default setting for this output terminal is the Output Low Speed indicator. This output terminal may be programmed to provide an indication that 1 of 62 possible events has taken place. This function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake (see F130). The OUT1 contact is rated at 2A/250 VAC.

OUT2 — The default setting for this output terminal is the ACC/DEC Complete indicator. This output terminal may be programmed to provide an indication that 1 of 62 possible events has taken place. This function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake (see F131). The OUT2 contact is rated at 2A/250 VAC.

FP — The default function of this output terminal is to output a series of pulses at a rate that is a function of the output frequency of the ASD. As the output frequency of the ASD goes up so does the FP output pulse rate. This terminal may be programmed to provide output pulses at a rate that is a function of the output frequency or the magnitude of any 1 of the 33 the functions listed in Table 7 on pg. 62 (see F676).

AM — This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 62. For further information on this terminal see parameter F670.

FM — This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 62. For further information on this terminal see F005.

FLC — FLC is the middle leg of a single-pole double-throw (relay) switch. This FLC contact of the relay is switched between FLB and FLA. This contact may be programmed to switch between FLB and FLA as a function of any 1 of the 62 conditions listed in Table 9 on pg. 82 (see F132 and Figure 5).

FLB — One of two contacts that, under user-defined conditions, connect to FLC (see Figure 5).

FLA — One of two contacts that, under user-defined conditions, connect to FLC (see Figure 5).

Note: The FLA and FLC contacts are rated at 2A/250 VAC. The FLB contact is rated at 1A/250 VAC.

CC — Control common (Do Not connect to Earth Gnd).

Figure 5. FLA, FLB, and FLC switching contacts shown in the de-energized state.

Note: The relay is shown in the Faulted or de-energized condition. During normal system operation the relay connection is FLC-to-FLA.



Figure 6. Control Terminal Strip PCB.

SW1 and SW2 may be switched to change the full-scale reading of the AM and FM output terminals. See F670 and F005 for further information on the AMand FM terminal adjustments.

SW1

TB1

0–1 mA 4–20 mA

CN7A

SW2

0–1 mA 4–20 mA

Shown below are the input and output terminals of the Control Terminal Strip.For further information on these terminals see pg. 23.

RRP24 RES F AR S1 S2 S3 S4 C C A

II Terminals

OUT1 OUT2

T o C o n t r o l B o a r d



H7 ASD ControlThe Control PCB (P/N 56000) serves as the primary control source for the H7 ASD and receives input from the Control Terminal Strip PCB (see Figure 6 on pg. 26), an Option Card, RS232/RS485 Communications, or the EOI.

The Control PCB has been enhanced to support two new functions: Multiple Protocol Communications and the ability to communicate in either half- or full-duplex modes.

Using the optional multiple-protocol communications interface; the ASD-NANOCOM, the Control PCB may be configured for the type of communications protocol being received and respond appropriately to the sending device. The ASD-NANOCOM connects to the J4 and J5 connectors (see Figure 7). A jumper PCB (P/N 55365) is required at the J4 connector if not using the ASD-NANOCOM.

The ASD-NANOCOM must be setup to support the desired communications protocol via Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication Settings. Consult the ASD-NANOCOM User’s Manual (P/N 10572-1.000-000) for a complete listing of the setup requirements.

Half or Full duplex communications is available when using RS232/RS485 communications. The jumpers at the JP1 and the JP2 connectors may be moved from one position to the other to facilitate either half- or full-duplex operation. If no jumpers are used the system will operate in the full duplex mode.

For more information on the H7 ASD communication requirements, please visit WWW.TIC.TOSHIBA.COM to acquire a copy of the 7-Series Communications User Manual and visit WWW.ICCDESIGNS.COM to acquire a copy of the ASD-NANOCOM User Manual.

Contact your Toshiba representative if more information is required on the ASD-NANOCOM.

Figure 7. Control Board of the H7 ASD (P/N 56000).

25-pin D-type connector. Connects to the Control Terminal Strip PCB (CN7).

RS232/RS485 signal I/O (CNU1).

EOI connection and Common Serial (TTL) I/O (CNU2).

CNU3

CN2CN8

CNU4

JP1 jumpers - Half-/Full-Duplex selection.

RS232/RS485 signal I/O (CN3).

ASD-NANOCOM.



CNU1/1A and CNU2/2A Pinout

Note: For normal operation, connect CNU1 to CNU1A or CNU2 to CNU2A. DO NOT connect both. If both are connected, the TTL and RS232/RS485 signals will be transferred simultaneously to and from the EOI and the control board resulting in a Communications Lost error message or erratic ASD operation.

Note: Connecting CNU1 to CNU2A will result in a continuous splash screen display. Connect CNU1 to CNU1A and continue normally. Connecting CNU2 to CNU1A will result in a continuous splash screen display. Connect CNU2 to CNU2A and continue normally.

Note: See the 7-Series Communications Manual (P/N 53840) for further information on the H7 ASD communications protocol and system configuration requirements.

CN3 PinoutCN3 is used for RS232/RS485 serial communications.

Pin # CNU1 Pinout(Controller PCB)

CNU1A Pinout(EOI)

Pin # CNU2 Pinout (Controller PCB)

CNU2A Pinout (EOI)

1 P24 P24 1 P24 P24

2 Gnd Gnd 2 Gnd Gnd

3 Tx (-) RXA 3 Rx Tx

4 Rx (+) TXA 4 Gnd Gnd

5 Rx (-) TXB 5 Tx Rx

6 Tx (+) RXB 6 Gnd Gnd

7 RS232/RS485 CNU3 Pin-7 7 Open Open

8 Gnd Gnd 8 Gnd Gnd

Pin NumberCNU3 Pinout

(Controller PCB)

1 RS232/RS485 Signal +

2 RS232/RS485 Signal -

3 RS232/RS485 Signal Gnd

4 Shield



CN7 PinoutListed below are the pinouts of the CN7 connector. The CN7 connector is the 25-pin D-type connector of the Control Board (see Figure 7).

Table 4. CN7 pinout assignments. Listed are the default settings for the programmable terminals.

Pin Number CN7 Pinout Pin Number CN7

Pinout

1 PP 14 II

2 FL 15 S1

3 VI 16 R

4 RR 17 S3

5 FM 18 S2

6 RX 19 N15

7 FP 20 S4

8 AM 21 P15

9 *OUT1 22 P24

10 *OUT2 23 CC

11 ST 24 CC

12 RES 25 CC

13 F — —

Note: * Open collector outputs.



I/O Circuit Configurations

Figure 8. Discrete input. Figure 9 RR input.

Figure 10. RX input. Figure 11. VI/II input.

Figure 12. P24 Output. Figure 13. PP Output.

Figure 14. OUT1/OUT2 Output. Figure 15. FP Output.

Figure 16. AM/FM Output. Figure 17. Fault Relay (during fault).



Typical Connection DiagramFigure 18. H7 ASD typical connection diagram.

Note: The AM, FM, VI, and II analog terminals are referenced to CC.

Note: See alternative ST-to-CC activation configuration on pg. 18.

Note: When connecting multiple wires to the PA, PB, PC, or PO terminals, do not connect a solid wire and a stranded wire to the same terminal.

H7 ASD



Electronic Operator InterfaceThe H7 ASD Electronic Operator Interface (EOI) is comprised of an LCD display, two LEDs, a rotary encoder, and eight keys. These items are described below and their locations are shown in Figure 19 on pg. 33.

The EOI can be mounted remotely from the ASD as described in the section titled EOI Remote Mounting on pg. 202. The mounting dimensions may also be found on pg. 202. Using a screw length that exceeds the specified dimensions may cause deformation of the outer surface of the bezel as shown in Figure 35 on pg. 204 and should be avoided.

The EOI can operate up to distances of 15 feet from the ASD via the Common Serial (TTL) Port. For distances beyond 15 feet, the RS-485 port is recommended.

EOI FeaturesLCD Display — Displays configuration information, performance data (e.g., motor frequency, bus voltage, torque, etc.), and diagnostic information.

Local|Remote Key — Toggles the system to and from the Local and Remote modes. The LED is on when the system is in the Local Command mode. The Local mode allows the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the EOI.

The Remote mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the Control Terminal Strip, LED Keypad, RS232/485, Communication Card, or Pulse Input. The selection may be made via Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Settings ⇒ Command Mode.

Note: The LED Keypad is under development and is unavailable at the time of the release of this manual.

The availability of the Local mode of operation (Command and Frequency control) may be disabled via Program ⇒ EOI Option Setups ⇒ Local/Remote Key. The availability of the Local mode of operation may be reinstated by changing this setting or performing a Reset (see F007).

Enter Key — Selects a menu item to be changed or accepts and records the changed data of the selected field (same as pressing the Rotary Encoder).

Esc Key — Returns to the previous level of the menu tree, toggles between the Panel and the Frequency Command screens, or cancels changes made to a field if pressed while still in the reverse video mode (dark background/light text).

Run Key — Issues the Run command while in the Local mode.

Run Key Status LED — Illuminates green while stopped or red while running.

Stop Key — Issues the Off command (decelerates to Stop at the programmed rate) if pressed once while in the Local mode or initiates an Emergency Off (terminates the ASD output and applies the brake if so configured) if pressed twice quickly from the Local or Remote modes.

Up Key — Increases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls up the menu listing (continues during press and hold).

Down Key — Decreases the value of the selected parameter or scrolls down the menu listing (continues during press and hold).



Rotary Encoder — Functions as the Up key, the Down key, and the Enter key. Turn the Rotary Encoder either clockwise or counterclockwise to perform the Up or Down key functions. Press the Rotary Encoder to perform the Enter function. Simultaneously pressing and turning the Rotary Encoder performs a user-defined function (see Program ⇒ EOI Option Setup ⇒ Preferences ⇒ Encoder Action).

MON/PRG — Provides a means to access the three root menus. Pressing the MON/PRG key repeatedly loops the system through the three root menus (see Figure 22 on pg. 44). While looping through the root menus, the Program menu will display the last menu screen or sub-menu item being accessed at the time that the MON/PRG key was pressed.

Figure 19. The H7 ASD Electronic Operator Interface.

EOI OperationThe EOI is the primary input/output device for the user. The EOI may be used to monitor system functions, input data into the system, or perform diagnostics.

Note: The Up/Down arrow keys and the Enter key may be used to perform the functions of the Rotary Encoder. The Rotary Encoder will be used in this explanation and throughout this manual for the Up, Down, and Enter key functions.

The software used with the H7 ASD is menu driven; thus, making it a select and click environment. The operating parameters of a motor may be selected and viewed or changed using the EOI.

To change a parameter setting, go to the Program mode by pressing the MON/PRG key until the Program menu is displayed. Turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired parameter (group) is within the cursor block. Press the Rotary Encoder to select (repeat if there is a submenu).

The selection will take on the reverse video format (dark background/light text). Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the value of the parameter. Press the Esc key while the display is in the reverse video mode to exit the menu without saving the change or press the Rotary Encoder to accept the new setting.

Repeated Esc key entries takes the menu back one level each time the Esc key is pressed until the root level is reached. After reaching the root level, continued Esc entries will toggle the system to and from the Frequency Command screen and the Panel menu.

Note: System changes made while in the Panel menu will affect Local LCD EOI-controlled ASD operation only. LED Keypad-controlled functions will not be affected. LED Keypad-controlled operation settings may be viewed or changed at F008.

LCD Display

Up/Down ArrowKeys

Rotary Encoder

Local/Remote

Monitor/ProgramKey

Enter Key

Esc Key

Stop|Reset Key

Key (LED)

Run Key(LED)



System Operation

Initial SetupUpon initial system powerup, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. The Startup Wizard assists the user with the initial configuration of the input power settings and the output parameters of the H7 ASD. The H7 ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the individual parameters (see the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 60).

The Startup Wizard querys the user for the following information:

1. Run now? (if selected continue on to step #2)/Run next time at power up? (if selected go to Program Mode)/Manually configure? (if selected go to Finish ⇒ Program Mode).

2. The Voltage and Frequency rating of the motor.

3. The Upper Limit frequency.

4. The Lower Limit frequency.

5. Adjust Accel/Decel times automatically? (if Yes, continue from step #8).

6. The Acceleration time.

7. The Deceleration Time.

8. The Volts/Hertz setting.

9. The motor Current rating.

10. The Command source.

11. The Frequency Reference source.

See the section titled Startup Wizard Requirements on pg. 36 for additional information on the Startup Wizard.

Operation (Local)Note: See F003 for information on Remote operation.

To turn the motor on, perform the following:

1. Press the MON/PRG key until the Frequency Command screen is displayed (see Figure 20.).2. Press the Local|Remote key to enter the Local mode (green Local LED illuminates).3. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise until the Frequency Command value is at the desired setting.4. Press the Run key and the motor runs at the Frequency Command value.

Note: The speed of the motor may be changed while the motor is running by using the Rotary Encoder to change the Frequency Command value.

5. Press the Stop|Reset key to stop the motor.

Figure 20. Frequency Command screen.



Default Setting ChangesTo change a default parameter setting, go to the root of the Program menu and turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block and press the Rotary Encoder (repeat if there is a submenu).

Press the Rotary Encoder to select the default setting to be changed and the selection takes on the reverse video format (dark background, light text). Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the value of the parameter. Press the ESC key before accepting the change to exit the menu without saving the change or press the Rotary Encoder to accept the new setting.

For a complete listing of the Program mode menu options, see the section titled Program Mode on pg. 48. Menu items are listed and mapped for convenience. The Direct Access Numbers are listed where applicable.

The default settings may also be changed by entering the Parameter Number of the setting to be changed at the Direct Access menu (Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ Applicable Parameter Number). A listing of the Direct Access/Parameter Numbers and a description of the associated parameter may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 60.

A listing of all parameters that have been changed from the default setting may be viewed sequentially by accessing the Changed From Default screen (Program ⇒ Changed From Default).

Note: Parameter F201 was changed to create the example shown in Figure 21.

The Changed From Default feature allows the user to view (or change) the parameters that are different from the default or the post-reset settings. Once the Changed From Default screen is displayed, the system automatically scrolls through all of the system parameters and halts once reaching a changed parameter.

The Rotary Encoder may be clicked once clockwise to continue scrolling forward or clicked once counterclockwise to begin scrolling in reverse. With each click of the Rotary Encoder from a stop, the system scrolls through the parameters and stops at the next parameter that has been changed.

Pressing the Rotary Encoder while a changed parameter is displayed accesses the settings of the changed parameter for viewing or changing.

Pressing ESC while the system is performing a Changed From Default search terminates the search. Pressing ESC when done searching (or halted at a changed parameter) returns the system to the Program Menu.

Figure 21. Changed From Default screen.



Startup Wizard RequirementsThe Startup Wizard queries the user for information on the input and output signal parameters of the H7 ASD. The H7 ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the control settings via the Program menu or the Direct Access Numbers (see the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 60).

Upon initial system powerup, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. The user is queried to either (1) run the Startup Wizard (Run Now), (2) perform a manual setting of user-selected parameters, or (3) run the Startup Wizard at the next power up.

If selection (2) is chosen, the system returns to the Program menu and defaults to the Startup Wizard on the next power up. If selection (3) is chosen, click the Finish box and the system returns to the Frequency Command screen. If selection (1) (Run Now) is selected, the Startup Wizard will start and assist the user with the configuration of the H7 True Torque Control2 Adjustable Speed Drive using the following user-input screens.

Voltage and Frequency Rating of the MotorMotors are designed and manufactured for a specific voltage and frequency range. The voltage and frequency specifications for a given motor may be found on the nameplate of the motor.

Upper Limit FrequencyThis parameter sets the highest frequency that the H7 ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The H7 ASD may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit Frequency (but, lower than the Maximum Frequency) when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).

Lower Limit FrequencyThis parameter sets the lowest frequency that the H7 ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The H7 ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower Limit may be output when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).



Adjust Accel/Decel Automatically?When enabled, the H7 ASD adjusts the acceleration and deceleration rates according to the applied load. The acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5 to 800% of the programmed values for the active acceleration time [e.g., Acceleration Time #1 (F009) and Deceleration Time #1 (F010)].

The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel/Decel.

If Automatic Accel/Decel is not enabled, the Acceleration screen will appear followed by the Deceleration screen as shown below.

Volts per Hertz SettingThis function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage of the ASD.

Settings:

Constant Torque

Variable Torque

Automatic Torque Boost

Sensorless Vector Control (Speed)

Automatic Torque Boost + Automatic Energy Savings

Sensorless Vector Control (Speed) + Automatic Energy Savings

V/f 5-point Setting (Opens 5-point Setting Screen)

Sensorless Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)

PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)

PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Position Switching)

Motor Current RatingThis parameter allows the user to input the full-load amperage (FLA) of the motor. This value is used by the H7 ASD to determine the Thermal Overload protection setting for the motor and may be found on the nameplate of the motor.

Acceleration Time Deceleration Time



Command SourceThis selection allows the user to establish the source of the Run commands (e.g., F, R, Stop, etc.).

Settings:

Use Control Terminal Strip

Use LED Keypad Option

Use Common Serial (TTL)

Use RS232/485

Use Communication Card

Frequency Reference SourceThis selection allows the user to establish the source of the Frequency (speed) command.

Settings:

Use VI/II

Use RR

Use RX

Use Option Card RX2


Use Binary/BCD Input


Use RS232/485


Use Motorized Pot Simulation

Use Pulse Input Option

Wizard: FinishThis screen is the final screen of the Startup Wizard. The basic parameters of the H7 ASD have been set. Click Finish to return to the Program mode. Additional application-specific programming may be required.



Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control

Command control includes instructions such as Stop, Run, Jog, etc. The source of the Command signal must be established for normal operation.

Frequency commands control the output speed of the ASD. The source of the frequency (speed) control signal must be established for normal operation.

The source of the command control and speed control may be either internal or external. Once the source signal is selected for either function, the system may be configured to use the selected signal all of the time or switch under user-defined conditions.

Command and Frequency control may be carried out using any one of several control methods (signal sources) or combinations thereof. In the event that multiple control commands are received, the signal sources are assigned priority levels. The primary control method for Command and Frequency control uses the settings of F003 and F004, respectively.

Command Control (F003)The Command Mode selection of F003 establishes the primary source of the command input for the ASD. However, the Override feature may supersede the F003 setting as indicated in Table 5.

Table 5 shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function. The level of the control item on the hierarchy is listed from left to right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in the table, the Override setting may supersede the F003 setting.

Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects either the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) as the Command Mode control source. Once in the Local mode, the LCD Port Connection setting determines if the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) will be used for Command control. Local mode operation may be superseded by other Communications Override settings.

Example: With the EOI set to Local and the LCD Port Connection set to Common Serial (TTL), setting the Communication Card or RS232/RS485 control to Override will supersede the Common Serial (TTL) setting.

The remaining control sources may be placed into the override mode using communications.

The source of the Command control signal may be selected by:

• The F003 setting,

• Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications, or

• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial [TTL] in the Override mode).

Possible Command signal source selections include the following:

• Use Control Terminal Strip (default),

• Use LED Keypad Option,

• Use Common Serial (TTL),

• Use RS232/RS485,



• Use Communication Card, or

• F003 setting (is used if no signal sources are in the Override mode).

Note: The Control Terminal Strip is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete terminal to Command Control Terminal Strip Priority and connecting the terminal to CC. Once activated (Run command required), the Control Terminal Strip settings will be used for Override Command control (F, R, Preset Speeds, etc.).

Frequency Control (F004)The Frequency Mode #1 (or the Frequency Mode #2) setting establishes the user-selected source of the frequency-control input for the ASD. The signal source selected here is used for speed control unless the Reference Priority Selection parameter is configured to automatically switch this setting (see F200) or if the Override feature is enabled (via communications or via the Local mode operation).

Table 5 shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function. The level of the control item on the hierarchy is listed from left to right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in the table, the Override setting may supersede the selection at F004.

Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects either the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) as the Frequency Mode #1 control source. Once in the Local mode, the LCD Port Connection setting determines if the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) will be used for Frequency Mode #1 control. Local mode operation may be superseded by other Communications Override settings.

Example: With the EOI set to Local and the LCD Port Connection set to Common Serial (TTL), setting the Communication Card or RS232/RS485 control to Override will supersede the Common Serial (TTL) setting.

The remaining control sources may be placed into the override mode using communications.

The source of the Frequency control signal may be selected by:

• The F004 setting,

• Placing an item from the list below in the Override mode via communications, or

• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS232/RS485 or Common Serial in the Override mode).

Possible Frequency control source selections include the following:

• Communication Card,

• RS232/RS485,

• Common Serial (TTL),

• LED Keypad,

• Control Terminal Strip (default setting), or

• F004 setting (used if no other items are in the Override mode).

Note: The Control Terminal Strip is placed in the Override mode by assigning a discrete terminal to VI/II Terminal Priority and connecting the terminal to CC. Once the discrete terminal is activated, VI/II is used as the Control Terminal Strip Override control item.



Command and Frequency Control SelectionsThe user may select only one Command source and only one source for Frequency control. The default settings for Command and Frequency control are Use Control Terminal Strip and Use RR, respectively.

The H7 ASD has a command register for each item listed as a Command or Frequency source. The registers store the Override setting for each control source. The registers are continuously scanned to determine if any of the listed items are in the Override mode.

For each scan cycle, the command registers of the control sources are scanned for the Override setting in the order that they are listed in Table 5. The first item of the Command section and the first item of the Frequency section detected as being in the Override mode will be used for Command and Frequency control, respectively. If no items are detected as being in the Override mode, the settings of F003 and F004 will be used for Command and Frequency control, respectively.

Any or all of the Command and Frequency control input sources may be placed in the Override mode.

Placing the H7 ASD in the Local mode (Local/Remote LED on) via the EOI places the RS232/RS485 or the Common Serial (TTL) control selections in the Override mode for Command and Frequency input (see the section titled Override Operation below for the proper setting). The Local/Remote control Override feature for Command and Frequency (or either) may be enabled/disabled at Program ⇒ ΕΟΙ Option Setups ⇒ Local-Remote Key (enabled with check in box).

Communications may be used to place the remaining Command and eligible Frequency control input sources in the Override mode. Once placed in the Override mode this setting is valid until it is cancelled, the power supply is turned off, or the unit is reset.



Override OperationThe command registers of the listed signal sources are scanned in the order that they are listed in Table 5 to determine which input sources are in the Override mode. During each register scan cycle, the first item detected as having the Override function turned on is the selection that is used for Command or Frequency control input.

The Override control setting supersedes the setting of the Command mode setting (F003) and the Frequency mode setting (F004). However, the F003 and F004 settings will be used in the event that the register scan returns the condition that none of the listed items have the Override feature turned on (see Table 5).

Command and Frequency-Control Override HierarchyTable 5 lists the input conditions and the resulting output control source selections for Command and Frequency control Override operation. The H7 ASD reads the command registers of the listed control items from the left to the right. In the table the number 1 indicates that the Override feature is turned on for that control input source; X = Don’t are; and 0 = Override Off.

The first item to be read that has the Override feature turned on will be used for Command or Frequency control.

Table 5. Command and Frequency control hierarchy.

Command Control SelectionsThe following is a listing and description of the Command Mode (F003) selections (Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode).

Settings:

Use Control Terminal Strip

Allows for Command control input via the 25-pin terminal strip on the Control Terminal Strip PCB.


The LED Keypad is unavailable at the time of this release.

Use Common (TTL)

Set the LCD Port Connection to Common Serial (TTL) to use this feature.

Use RS232/RS485

Set the LCD Port Connection to RS232/RS485 to use this feature.


Routes the control and monitoring I/O to CNU3 of the Control Board of the H7 ASD (Communication Card connector).

1 2 3 4 5 6 Priority Level

Communication Card

RS232/RS485

Common Serial

Panel (LED

Keypad)

Control Terminal(Binary/BCD Input)

F003/F004Command/

Frequency Mode

1 X X X X X Communication Card0 1 X X X X RS232/RS4850 0 1 X X X Common Serial0 0 0 1 X X Panel (LED Keypad)0 0 0 0 1 X Control Terminal0 0 0 0 0 F003/F004 Setting F003/F004 Setting



Frequency Control Selections

The following is a listing and description of the Frequency Mode (F003) selections (Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1).

Settings:

Use VI/II

0 to 10-volt DC analog input connected to VI or a 4 – 20 mA (or 0 to 1 mA) DC current connected to II (cannot use both simultaneously).

Use RR

0 to 10-volt DC analog input connected to RR.

Use RX

-10 to +10-volt DC analog input connected to RX.

Use Option Card RX2

-10 to +10-volt DC analog input connected to RX2.


The LED Keypad is unavailable at the time of this release.

Use Binary/BCD Input

Allows for discrete terminal input to control the ASD output.


To use the EOI for control requires that the LCD Port Connection be set to Common Serial (TTL) to use this feature.

Use RS232/RS485

To use the EOI for control requires that the LCD Port Connection be set to RS232/RS485 to use this feature.


Routes the control and monitoring I/O to CNU3 of the Control Board of the H7 ASD (Option Card connector).

Use Motorized Pot Simulation

A discrete terminal may be configured to increase or decrease the speed of the motor by momentarily connecting the assigned terminal to CC. See Table 8 on page 77 for further information on this feature.

Use Pulse Input Option

Configures the system to receive pulse input. See PG Speed Reference Setpoint on pg. 108 for further information on this feature.



System Configuration and Menu Options

Root MenusThe MON/PRG (Monitor/Program) key accesses the three primary modes of the H7 ASD: the Frequency Command mode, the Monitor mode, and the Program mode. From either mode, press the MON/PRG key to loop through to the other two modes (see Figure 22). While in the Frequency Command mode, pressing the ESC key toggles the menu to and from the Panel menu and the Frequency Command mode.

Note: Parameter changes made from the Panel menu are effective for Local LCD EOI control Only.

Figure 22. Root menu mapping.

Frequency Command Mode

Frequency Setting

While operating in the Local mode (Local LED is illuminated on the front panel), the running frequency of the motor may be set from the Frequency Command screen. Using the Rotary Encoder, enter the Frequency Command value and then press the Run key. The motor will run at the Frequency Command speed and may be changed while running.

Scrolling Monitor

The Output Current and the ASD Load values are displayed below the Frequency Command parameter of the Frequency Command screen (default setting). Other user-selected parameters may be displayed on this screen for quick-access monitoring while running. These parameters may be accessed and enabled for display by placing a check in the box next to the item listed at Program ⇒ Monitor Setup ⇒ Scrolling Monitor Select. If no parameters are enabled for display, No Items is displayed.

When more than two items are selected for display the items are scrolled automatically. The display time for each selected item may be set from 1 to 60 seconds. The parameters that may be displayed on the Scrolling Monitor are listed in the section titled Monitor Mode on pg. 46.



Panel MenuThe Panel menu may be accessed in either of two ways: while operating using the LED Keypad Option the Panel menu may be accessed via F008 or if operating in the Local mode using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency Command screen.

The control settings of the Panel menu are effective for LED keypad control only if accessed via Direct Access method F008 and are effective for the LCD EOI control only if accessed via the Frequency Command screen. Changes made to either of the Panel menus are not carried over to the other Panel menu.

Using either method provides quick access to the following Panel menu parameters:

Direction — Forward or Reverse (see F008 for further information on this setting).

Stop Pattern — The Decel Stop or Coast Stop settings determines the method used to stop the motor when using the Stop|Reset key of the EOI. The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system setup at F250, F251, and F252. The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load.

Note: The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603.

V/f Group — 1 of 4 V/f profiles may be selected and run. Each V/f profile is comprised of 4 user settings: Base Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, Manual Torque Boost, and Electronic Thermal Protection. Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 60.

Accel/Decel Group — 1 of 4 Accel/Decel profiles may be selected and run. Each of the Accel/Decel profiles is comprised of 3 user settings: Acceleration, Deceleration, and Pattern. Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 60 (or see F009 at the EOI).

Feedback in Panel Mode — This feature enables or disables the PID feedback function.

Torque Limit Group — This parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor (of a multiple motor configuration). The settings of profiles 1 – 4 may be setup at F441, F444, F446, and F448, respectively.



Monitor ModeThe Monitor mode allows the user to monitor motor performance variables, control settings, and configuration data during motor operation. There are 46 items that may be monitored from this mode. The items are listed and described below.

Note: The Monitor mode is a read-only mode. The settings cannot be changed from the Monitor mode. For information on how to change the values, see the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg. 35.

Running Frequency — Displays the H7 ASD Output Frequency.

Frequency Reference — Displays the Frequency Setpoint.

Output Current — Displays the Output Current as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.

Bus Voltage — Displays the Bus Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.

Output Voltage — Displays the Output Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.

Input Signal Status — Displays the status of the discrete input lines of the Control Terminal Strip.

Out1 Out2 FL — Displays the status of the discrete output lines of the Control Terminal Strip.

Timer — Displays the Cumulative Run Time in hours.

Postcomp Frequency — Displays the Output Frequency after the application of the slip compensation correction value.

Feedback (inst.) — Provides a status of the Real Time Feedback in Hz.

Feedback (1 second) — Provides a status of the 1-Second Averaging feedback in Hz.

Torque — Displays the Output Torque as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.

Torque Reference — Displays the Torque Reference as a percentage.

Torque Current — Displays the current being used to produce torque.

Excitation Current — Displays the current required to produce the excitation field.

PID Value — Displays the PID feedback value in Hz (Proportional-Integral-Derivative).

Motor Overload — Displays the Motor Overload value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor.

ASD Overload — Displays the ASD Overload as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.

DBR Overload — Displays the DBR Overload value as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.

Motor Load — Displays the Motor Load in real time as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor.

ASD Load — Displays the ASD Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.

DBR Load — Displays the DBR Load as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.

Input Power — Displays the Input Power in Kilowatts (Kw).

Output Power — Displays the Output Power in Kilowatts (Kw).

Peak Current — Displays the Peak Current since the last start was initiated. The current is displayed as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.



Peak Voltage — Displays the Peak Voltage since the last start was initiated. The voltage is displayed as a percentage of the rated capacity of the H7 ASD.

PG Speed — Displays the PG Speed.

Direction — Displays the Direction command (forward/reverse).

PG Position — Displays the Pulse Generator Position.

RR — Displays the RR input value as a percentage of the full range of the RR value (potentiometer input).

VI/II — Displays the VI/II input setting as a percentage of the full range of the VI/II value.

Note: The VI/II input represents two analog inputs (and terminals). The VI input terminal is used for a 0 – 10 VDC analog signal and the II input terminal is used for current loop applications, such as with a 4-20 mA signal. Either may be used as a frequency or torque command source; however, the two cannot function simultaneously. Throughout this manual they will be listed as VI/II.

RX — Displays the RX input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX value (-10 to +10 VDC input).

RX2 — Displays the RX2 input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX2 value.

Note: The RX2 function is available on the ASD-Multicom option board only.

FM — Displays the output frequency value as a percentage of the full range of the FM value.

AM — Displays the output current as a percentage of the full range of the AM value.

Option Type — Displays the type form number of the installed ASD-Multicom option board.

Option Term A — TBD.

Option Term B — TBD.

Option Term O — TBD.

Option Term P — TBD.

Max. Output — TBD.

Pattern Select — Displays the selected pattern if using Pattern Run.

Repeats Left — Displays the number of patterns remaining if using Pattern Run.

Pattern — Displays the active Pattern Run ID number.

Pattern Time Left — Displays the time remaining in the current pattern if using Pattern Run.

Fault Status — Displays the current fault or No Fault.



Program ModeTable 6 lists the menu items of the Program mode and maps the flow of the menu selections. The Parameter Numbers for the listed functions are provided where applicable. The functions listed may be accessed (and changed) as mapped below or via the Direct Access method: Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ Applicable Parameter Number.

Table 6. Program mode mapping.

Program Menu Navigation

Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter NameParameter

Number

FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS Frequency Setting

Maximum Frequency F011

Upper Limit F012

Lower Limit F013

V/f Pattern F015

Standard Mode Selection

Command Mode F003

Frequency Mode #1 F004

Frequency Mode #2 F207

Reference Priority Selection F200

Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency F208

Accel/Decel #1 Settings

Accel #1 F009

Decel #1 F010

Accel/Decel Pattern F502

Automatic Accel/Decel Enable/Disable F000

Motor Set #1

#1 Base Frequency F014

#1 Max Output Voltage F306

#1 Torque Boost F016

#1 Electronic Thermal Protection Level F600

STARTUP WIZARD (See the section titled Startup Wizard Requirements on pg. 36.) N/A

CHANGED FROM DEFAULT

(See the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg. 35.) N/A

DIRECT ACCESS (See the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 60.) N/A

EOI OPTION SETUPS Contrast (adjustment)Darker (highlight Darker and press Enter) N/A

Lighter (highlight Lighter and press Enter) N/A

Local/Remote KeyCommand N/A

Frequency N/A

Realtime Clock Setup Date and time setting (requires RTC option) N/A

Preferences

Double Click Speed N/A

Arrow Speed N/A

Encoder Speed N/A

Encoder Action N/A

Alarm PopupsOverheat Alarm N/A

Undervoltage Alarm N/A



EOI OPTION SETUPS

Alarm Popups

Over-current Alarm N/A

ASD Overload Alarm N/A

Motor Overload Alarm N/A

Timer N/A

Overtorque Alarm N/A

DBR Resistor Alarm N/A

Lockout

Lockout Reset N/A

Lockout Monitor N/A

Lockout Run/Stop N/A

Lockout Parameter Access N/A

Lockout Parameter Write N/A

Lockout Frequency Change N/A

Lockout Options N/A

Lockout Local/Remote N/A

Password (Enable/Enter) N/A

Review Startup Screen (displays the Startup screen) N/A

UTILITY PARAMETERS

Versions (read only)

Typeform N/A

CPU Version N/A

CPU Revision N/A

EEPROM #1 Version N/A

EEPROM #2 Version N/A

EOI Version N/A

Display Units

User-defined Units Enable/Disable N/A

User-defined Units N/A

Hz Per User-defined Unit F702

Frequency Display Resolution F703

Units for Voltage and Current F701

Type Reset

None

F007

Auto Setup for 50 Hz

Auto Setup for 60 Hz

Restore Factory Defaults

Clear Trip

Clear Run Timer

New Base Drive Board

Save User Parameters

Restore User Parameters

Reload EOI Flash

Reset EOI Memory

Comm. Stops During Reset



Number



TERMINAL SELECTION

PARAMETERS

Input Terminal Function

F F111

R F112

ST F113

RES F114

S1 F115

S2 F116

S3 F117

S4 F118

S5 F119

S6 F120

S7 F121

12 F122

13 F123

14 F124

15 F125

16 F126

ON F110

Output Terminal Functions

Out 1 F130

Out 2 F131

FL F132

4 F133

5 F134

6 F135

7 F136

Analog Input Functions

Acc/Dec Base Frequency Adjustment F650

Upper-limit Frequency Adjustment F651

Acceleration Time Adjustment F652

Deceleration Time Adjustment F653

Torque Boost Adjustment F654

Reach SettingsLow Speed Signal Output Frequency F100

Speed Reach Setting Frequency F101

FP Terminal SettingsFP Terminal Meter Selection F676

FP Terminal Meter Adjustment F677

Input Special Functions

ST Signal Selection F103

F/R Priority Selection (w/both on) F105

Input Terminal Priority F106

Extended Terminal Function F107

Line Power Switching (Commercial Power Switching) On Trip Enable/Disable

F354



Number



TERMINAL SELECTION

PARAMETERS

Line Power Switching

Switching-Frequency Setting and Enable/Disable

F355

ASD-Output Switching Wait-Time F356

Commercial Input-Power Wait-Time F357

Commercial-Power Switching-Frequency Hold-Time

F358

Input Terminal Delays

F F140

R F141

ST F142

RES F143

S1-S4 F144

S5-S16 F145

Output Terminal Delays

Out1 On Delay F150

Out1 Off Delay F160

Out2 On Delay F151

Out2 Off Delay F161

FL On Delay F152

FL Off Delay F162

Out4 On Delay F153

Out4 Off Delay F163

Out5 On Delay F154

Out5 Off Delay F164

Out6 On Delay F155

Out6 Off Delay F165

Out7 On Delay F156

Out7 Off Delay F166

FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS

Analog Filter Analog Input Filter Selection F209

Speed Ref. Setpoint

VI/II F201

RR F210

RX F216

RX2 F222

BIN F228

PG F234

Jog Settings

Jog Run Frequency F260

Jog Stop Control F261

Jog Window Enable/Disable N/A

Preset Speeds

#1 Frequency & Characteristics F018






Number



FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS

Preset Speeds












Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Enable/Disable F380

Fwd/Rev Disable Disable Forward Run/Disable Reverse Run F311

Motorized Pot Settings

Motorized Pot Setting Disposition at Power Down

F108

Minimum Frequency N/A

Maximum Frequency N/A

PROTECTION

PARAMETERS

Dynamic Braking Dynamic Braking Enable/Disable & Configuration

F304

Stall

Over-current Stall Level F601

Over-voltage Stall Enable/Disable F305

Over-voltage Stall Level Configuration N/A

Over-voltage Stall Level (Fast) F625

Continuing Stall Period (During Positive Torque/Speed)

F452

Stall Prevention During Regeneration F454

DC (Injection) Braking

DC Injection Start Frequency F250

DC Injection Braking Current F251

DC Injection Braking Time F252

Motor Shaft Fixing Control F253

Motor Shaft Stationary Control Enable/Disable F254

Emergency Off Settings

Emergency Off Mode Configuration F603

DC Injection Braking Time F604

Emergency Off Activation of the FL Output Enable/Disable

N/A

Retry/Restart Configuration

Number of Retries F303

Restart Conditions F301

Scan Rate F312

Lock-on Rate F313

Search Method F314

Search Inertia F315



Number



PROTECTION

PARAMETERS Undervoltage/Ridethrough

Ridethrough Mode F302

Ridethrough Time F310

Undervoltage Stall Level F629

Undervoltage Trip Enable/Disable F627

Undervoltage Detection Time F628

Overload

OL Reduction Starting Frequency F606

Motor 150% OL Time Limit F607

Soft Stall Enable/Disable F017

Motor Overload Trip Enable/Disable N/A

V/f Motor Enable/Disable N/A

Trip Settings Trip Save at Power Down Enable/Disable F602

Cooling Fan Control Cooling Fan Control Mode F620

Cumulative Run Timer Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting F621

Phase Loss Output Phase Loss Detection Enable/Disable F605

Low Current Settings Low Current Trip/Alarm Configuration F610

Abnormal Speed Settings

Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time F622

Overspeed Detection Frequency Range F623

Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range F624

Short Circuit Detect PulseShort-Circuit-Pulse Run Command F613

Short-Circuit-Pulse Run Duration F614

Overtorque Settings

Overtorque Trip Enable/Disable F615

Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level During Power Operation

F616

Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level During Regeneration

F617

Overtorque Detection Time F618

Brake Fault TimerBraking Trouble Internal Timer F630

Release After Run Timer F632

Base Frequency VoltageSupply Voltage Compensation Enable/Disable

F307Output Voltage Limitation Enable/Disable

Soft StartSuppression of Inrush-Current Timing F608

Interlock with ST F609

TORQUE SETTING

PARAMETERSSet Points

VI/II F205

RR F214

RX F220

RX2 F226

BIN F232

Torque Control

Torque Command Selection F420

Torque Command Filter F421

Synchronized Torque Bias Input Selection F422



Number



TORQUE SETTING

PARAMETERSTorque Control

Tension Torque Bias Input Selection F423

Load Sharing Gain Input Selection F424

Torque Limit Settings

Positive Torque Limit #1Selection F440

Negative Torque Limit #1Selection F442

Manual Settings F441

Torque Limit Mode F450

Torque Limit Mode (speed dependent) F451

Manual Torque Limit Settings

#1 Positive/Negative Torque Limit Settings F441




Torque Speed Limiting

Torque Command Mode Selection F429

Forward Speed Limit Selection F425

Forward Speed Limit Level F426

Reverse Speed Limit Selection F427

Reverse Speed Limit Level F428

Speed Limit Torque Reference Selection F430

Speed Limit Torque Level F431

Speed Limit Torque Band F432

Speed Limit Torque Recovery Time F433

FEEDBACK

PARAMETERS

Feedback Settings

Input Selection F360

Proportional (P) Gain F362

Integral (I) Gain F363

Differential (D) Gain F366

Delay Filter F361

Deviation Limits F364

Position Difference Limit F631

PG Settings

Number of PG Input Pulses F367

PG Input Phases F368

PG Disconnection Detection Selection F369

Electronic Gear Setting F370

Position Loop Gain F371

Positioning Completion Range F372

Frequency Limit at Position F373

Current Control Proportional Gain F374

Current Control Integral Gain F375

Speed Loop Proportional Gain F376

Speed Loop Integral Gain F377

Motor Counter Data Selection F378

Speed Loop Parameter Ratio F379



Number



FEEDBACK

PARAMETERS

Drooping Control

Drooping Gain 100% F320

Speed at Drooping Gain 0% F321

Speed at Drooping Gain 100% F322

Drooping Insensitive Torque Band F323

Drooping Output Filter F324

Drooping Reference F327

Load Inertia (Acc/Dec Torque) F325

Load Torque Filter F326

Override Control

Adding Input Selection F660

Multiplying Input Selection F661

LED Option Override Multiplication Gain F729

PATTERN RUN

CONTROL PARAMETERSPattern Run Pattern Run Mode Enable/Disable and Restart

ConfigurationF520

Speeds

Pattern #1 Speeds F530




Preset Speeds
















Preset Speed Mode Use Preset Speed Enable/Disable F380

COMMUNICATION

SETTING PARAMETERS

Communication Settings

ASD Number F802

Logic (TTL) Baud Rate F800

RS232/RS485 Baud Rate F820

Parity F801

RS232/RS485 Communication Time Out Time F803

Logic (TTL) Communication Time Out Action F804

RS232/RS485 Communication Time Out Action

N/A



Number



COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS

Communication Settings

Communication Interval (logic) F805

RS232/RS485 Wire Count F821

RS232/RS485 Response Time F825

TTL Master Output Selection F806

RS232/RS485 Master Output Selection F826

LCD Port Connection Type N/A

Communication Reference Adjust

Frequency Point Selection F810

S20 Settings

Receive Address F860

Transmit Address F861

Speed Reference Station F862

Speed Reference Address F863

Torque Reference Station F865

Torque Reference Address F866

Fault Detect Station Number F868

Station Mode F869

S20 Reset F899

Error Mode F850

Error Detect Time F851

Scan Receive Settings

#1 Scan Receive F831






Scan Transmit Settings

#1 Scan Transmit F841






Communication Error Command Request Disposition on Error F830

Optional Parameters

Optional Parameter #1 F890







Number



METER TERMINAL

ADJUSTMENT

PARAMETERS

FMFM Terminal Assignment F005

FM Terminal Adjustment F006

AMAM Terminal Assignment F670

AM Terminal Adjustment F671

Analog1Analog 1 Terminal Assignment F672

Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment F673

Analog2Analog 2 Terminal Assignment F674

Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment F675

MOTOR PARAMETERS

Vector Motor Model

AutoTune Enable/Disable and Reset Config. F400

AutoTune Enable/Disable of Motor Constant 3 F414

Slip Frequency Gain F401

Motor Constant 1 (primary resistance) F402

Motor Constant 2 (secondary resistance) F403

Motor Constant 3 (exciting inductance) F404

Motor Constant 4 (load inertia) F405

Motor Constant 5 (leakage inductance) F410

Motor Settings

Number of Motor Poles F411

Motor Capacity (kW) F412

Motor Type F413

Motor Set #1





Motor Set #2





Motor Set #3





Motor Set #4





MONITOR SETUP Trip History Trip History Records N/A

Trip Monitor from ASD

Most Recent N/A

Second Most Recent N/A

Third Most Recent N/A



Number



MONITOR SETUP Trip Monitor From ASD Fourth Most Recent N/A

Scrolling Monitor Select Scrolling Monitor Select N/A

SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMETERS Frequency Control

Start Frequency F240

End Frequency F243

Run Frequency F241

Run Frequency Hysteresis F242

Jump FrequenciesJump Frequency Bandwidth Settings F271

Jump Frequency Processing Selection F276

Carrier Frequency PWM Carrier Frequency Setting F300

Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings

Accel/Decel/Pattern #1 Configuration F009




Accel/Decel Special

S-Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment F506

S-Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment F507

Accel/Decel Time Lower Limit F508

Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #1 F505



Accel/Decel Display Resolution F704

Crane/Hoist Load

High-Speed Operation at Light Load F330

Light-load High-speed Operation Switching Lower Limit Frequency

F331

Light-load High-speed Operation Load Waiting Time

F332

Light-load High-speed Operation Load Detection Time

F333

Light-load High-speed Operation Heavy Load Detection Time

F334

Switching Load Torque During Forward Run F335

Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in the Forward Direction

F336

Heavy Load Torque During Fixed Speed in the Forward Direction

F337

Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run F338

Heavy Load Torque During Acceleration in the Reverse Direction

F339

Heavy Load Torque During Fixed Speed in the Reverse Direction

F340

Frequency for Automatic High-speed Operation at Light Load

F341

Backlash Setup Not available at the time of this release. N/A



Number



SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMETERS

V/f Five Point Setting

#1 Frequency Setting F190

#1 Voltage Setting F191









Low Output Disable Function

LOD Control and Stopping Method F731

LOD Start Level F732

LOD Start Time F733

LOD Setpoint Boost F734

LOD Boost Time F735

LOD Feedback Level F736

LOD Restart Delay Time F737

Earth Fault

Earth Fault Alarm Level F640

Earth Fault Alarm Time F641

Earth Fault Trip Level F642

Earth Fault Trip Time F643

Special Parameters

V/f Adjustment Coefficient F183

0 Hz Dead Band Frequency Setting Signal F244

0 Hz Command Stop Function F255

Over Exciting Cooperation F481

Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone

F485

Exciting Starting Rate N/A

Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss F487

Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time

N/A

Dead Time Compensation Enable/Disable F489

Dead Time Compensation Bias F490

Switching Frequency Between Current and Voltage

F491

Optional Analog Terminal Mark N/A

Current Differential Gain F454

Exciting Strengthening Coefficient F480

Enable/Disable User Parameter Initialization During Typeform Initialization

F709

% Current Vector Control F482

% Voltage Vector Control F483

% Constant Vector Control F484



Number


F000 F003


Direct Access Parameter InformationThe H7 ASD has the ability to allow the user direct access to the motor control functions. The functions listed below have an associated Parameter Number which accesses its setting. There are two ways in which the motor-control parameters may be accessed for modification: Program ⇒ applicable menu path or Program ⇒ Direct Access ⇒ applicable parameter number. Both methods access the parameter via the Program mode. Once accessed, the parameter may be viewed or changed.

The Program mode allows the user to develop an application-specific motor control profile. Motor control functions may be set to accommodate specific power and timing requirements for a given application. The configurable parameters of the Program mode that have user-accessible Parameter Numbers are listed and described below.

Note: The setup procedures included within this section may require a Reset before performing the procedure. Application-specific settings may then be performed. The pre-Reset conditions may be saved (see F007).

Direct Access Parameters/Numbers

Automatic Accel/Decel #1

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 Settings

This parameter Enables/Disables the ability of the ASD to adjust the acceleration and deceleration rates in accordance with the applied load automatically.

The adjusted acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5% to 800% of the programmed values for Acceleration Time #1 (F009) and Deceleration Time #1 (F010).

Settings:

DisabledEnabled (box checked)

Note: The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel/Decel.

Direct Access Number — F000

Parameter Type — Check Box

Factory Default — Disabled

Changeable During Run — No

Command Mode Selection

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode

The Command Mode Selection establishes the source of the command input for the ASD. Command inputs include Run, Stop, Forward, etc. The Override feature may supersede the Command Mode Selection setting (see Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg. 39).

Settings:

Use Control Terminal StripUse LED Keypad OptionUse Common Serial (TTL)Use RS232/RS485Use Communication Card


Parameter Type — Selection List

Factory Default — Use Control Terminal Strip



F004 F006


Frequency Mode #1

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1

The Frequency Mode #1 setting establishes the source of the frequency-control input for the ASD. The Override feature may supersede the Frequency Mode #1 setting (see Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg. 39).

Note: Only Bolded items from the Settings list below may be placed in the Override mode. See the section titled Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg. 39 for further information on the Override feature.

Settings:

Use VI/IIUse RRUse RXUse Option Card RX2Use LED Keypad OptionUse Binary/BCD InputUse Common Serial (TTL)Use RS232/RS485Use Communication CardUse Motorized Pot. SimulationUse Pulse Input Option



Factory Default — Use RR


FM Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ FM

This setting determines the output function of the FM analog output terminal. The FM output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 62.

Note: To read voltage at this terminal a 100 – 500Ω resistor is required and it must be connected from FM (+) to FM (-). The voltage is read across the 100 – 500Ω resistor. Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from FM (+) to FM (-).

The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1/1024. The FM Terminal Adjustment (F006) must be used to calibrate the output signal for a proper response. SW-2 may be switched to allow for the full-range output to be either 0 – 1 mA or 4 – 20 mA when providing an output current, or either 0 – 1 or 1 – 7.5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal.



Factory Default — Output Frequency

Changeable During Run — Yes

FM Terminal Adjustment

Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ FM

This function is used to calibrate the FM analog output terminal.

To calibrate the FM analog output, connect a meter (current or voltage) as described at F005. With the drive running at a known frequency, adjust this parameter (F006) until the running frequency produces the desired DC level output at the FM terminal.


Parameter Type — Numerical

Factory Default — 512


Minimum — 0

Maximum — 1280



The magnitude of the AM/FM output signal at full-scale is selection-specific and may be adjusted (see F671 and F006) to fit application-specific requirements. Table 7 shows the default full-scale output setting of the AM/FM terminal for each selection. The column on the right side of Table 7 shows the actual AM/FM output for an EOI display of 100% (default setting).

Table 7. Output terminal selections for the AM, FM, FP, and Analog 1 & 2 terminals.

FunctionAM/FM Output Value at

100% EOI-Displayed Output

Output Frequency (FM and FP default setting)Maximum Frequency

Frequency Reference

Output Current (AM default setting)

150%DC Bus Voltage

Output Voltage (Analog 1 default setting)

Post-compensation Frequency (Analog 2 default setting)

Maximum FrequencySpeed Feedback (realtime)

Speed Feedback (1 sec filter)

Torque

150%

Torque Command

Internal Torque Base

Torque Current

Excitation Current

PID Feedback Value Maximum Frequency

Motor Overload Ratio Motor Overload Trip Point Setting

ASD Overload Ratio ASD Overload Trip Point Setting

PBR (DBR) Overload Ratio DBR Overload Trip Point Setting

PBR (DBR) Load Ratio Maximum DBR Duty Cycle

Input Power1.73 * input voltage * ASD rated current

Output Power

Peak Output Current150%

Peak DC Bus Voltage

PG Counter32767 Encoder Pulses

Position Pulse

RR Input

100%

VI/II Input

RX Input

RX2 Input

FM Output (used for factory testing only)

AM Output (used for factory testing only)

Meter Adjust Value

Analog Output

Load Torque 150%


F007 F008


Type Reset

Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Type Reset

This feature assists the user when performing fault analysis or by allowing a quick system setup change when required. Performing a Type Reset results in one of the following user-selected post-reset configurations.

Settings:

NoneAuto Setup for 50 HzAuto Setup for 60 HzRestore Factory DefaultsClear TripClear Run TimerNew Base Drive Board*Save User ParametersRestore User ParametersReload EOI FlashReset EOI Memory

Note: *User settings that are stored in the memory of the EOI are not saved via the Save User Parameters selection. The unsaved functions include the EOI Option Setups, (Utility Parameters ⇒) Display Units, and (Monitor Setup ⇒) Scrolling Monitor Select.



Factory Default — None


Direction (of motor rotation)

No path available (Direct Access Only)

While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter sets the direction of motor rotation. This setting may be changed during operation. This setting will not override parameter F311 (Forward/Reverse Disable).

If either direction is disabled via parameter F311, the disabled direction will not be recognized if commanded by the LED Keypad. If both directions are disabled via parameter F311, the direction command from the LED Keypad will determine the direction of the motor rotation.

Settings:

ForwardReverse

Note: If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access the Motor Direction parameter.



Factory Default — Forward


Reset


F009 F012


Accel #1 Time


This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the #1 Acceleration profile. The accel/decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using F508.

Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time.

Acceleration

The acceleration rate of a motor is determined by several factors: applied power, applied load, and the physical properties of the motor (winding parameters, motor size, etc.). The ASD will control the first of these factors: input power. The settings of the ASD control the frequency and amplitude of the applied voltage to the motor.

Under most operating conditions, as the output frequency of the drive goes up so does the output voltage (linear acceleration). The ASD has the ability to modify the relationship between frequency and voltage automatically to produce smoother operation or increased (starting) torque.



Factory Default — (ASD-dependent)


Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds

Decel #1 Time


This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #1 Deceleration profile. The accel/decel pattern may be set using F502.

When operating with the Automatic Accel/Decel enabled (F000) the minimum accel/decel time may be set using F508.

Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time.





Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds

Maximum Frequency

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Frequency Settings

This setting determines the absolute maximum frequency that the ASD can output. This setting is also referred to as FH.

Accel/decel times are calculated based on the Maximum Frequency setting.

Note: This setting may not be lower than the Upper Limit setting (F012).



Factory Default — 80.0


Minimum — 30.0

Maximum — 299.0

Units — Hz

Upper Limit Frequency


This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit Frequency (but, lower than the Maximum Frequency) when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).

Note: This setting may not be higher than the Maximum Frequency (F011) setting.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — Max. Freq. (F011)

Units — Hz


F013 F015


Lower Limit Frequency


This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower Limit may also be output when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — Upper Limit (F012)

Units — Hz

Motor #1 Base Frequency

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #1

The Base Frequency setting determines the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The maximum voltage setting cannot be more that the input voltage (see Maximum Output Voltage at F306). There are four Base Frequency profile settings: #1 – #4.

Note: For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency is normally set for the name-plated frequency of the motor.





Minimum — 25.0

Maximum — 299.0

Units — Hz

V/f Pattern


This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage.

Settings:

Constant TorqueVariable TorqueAutomatic Torque BoostSensorless Vector Control (speed)Auto Torque Boost with Automatic Energy SavingsSensorless Vector Control (speed) with Automatic Energy SavingsV/f 5-Point Setting (opens 5-point setting screen)Sensorless Vector Control (speed/torque switching)PG Feedback Vector Control (speed/torque switching)PG Feedback Vector Control (speed/position switching)

Note: For proper operation, the carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except while operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.

The Automatic Torque Boost and the Sensorless Vector Control selections use the motor tuning parameters of the drive to properly configure the ASD for the motor being used. If Load Reactors or Long Lead Filters are used, or if the capacity of the ASD is greater than the motor, manual tuning of the motor parameters may be required for optimum performance.



Factory Default — Constant Torque



F016 F017


Motor #1 Torque Boost

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #1

The Motor #1 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high-inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below ½ of the #1 Base Frequency (F014) setting.

The value programmed as a boost percentage establishes an output voltage vs. output frequency relationship to be used to start the motor or to provide smoother operation.

Note: Setting an excessive Torque Boost level may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 30.0

Units — %

Soft Stall

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overload

This parameter Enables/Disables the Soft Stall function. When enabled, the Soft Stall function reduces the output frequency of the ASD when the current requirements of the motor exceed the Electronic Thermal Protection #1 setting (F600); thus, reducing the output current.

If the current drops below the motor overload protection level setting within a specified time, the output of the ASD will accelerate to the programmed frequency setpoint. If not, a trip will be incurred.

The Soft Stall feature is available when the (Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overload ⇒) Motor Overload Trip Enable/Disable parameter is enabled only.

Soft Stall is highly effective in preventing motor overload trips when used on fans, blowers, pumps, and other centrifugal loads which require less torque at lower frequencies.

Note: The Soft Stall setting may affect acceleration times and patterns.

Settings:







F018 F019


Preset Speed #1

Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 1

Up to 15 output frequency values that fall within the Lower Limit and the Upper Limit range may be programmed into the drive and output as a Preset Speed. This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0001 and is identified as Preset Speed #1. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed.

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Preset Speed control input at the S1 – S4 terminals:

1. Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip.

2. Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminals ⇒ S1 (set to Preset Speed Command 1; LSB of 4-bit count). Repeat for S2 – S4 (MSB of 4-bit count) as Preset Speed Command 2 – 4, respectively (all Normally Open).

Note: The default setting of S4 is EOff, but this terminal may be re-assigned as the MSB.

3. Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 1 (press Enter twice and set an output frequency as Preset Speed #1; repeat for Preset Speeds 2 – 15 as required).

4. Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Preset Speed Mode ⇒ Use Speed Modes (Enable/Disable).

When Enabled, the direction, accel/decel, and torque settings of the Preset Speed being run are used.

When Disabled, only the speed setting of the Preset Speed being run is used.

5. Place the system in the Remote mode (Local|Remote LED Off).

6. Provide a Run command (connect F and/or R to CC).

Connect S1 to CC to run Preset Speed #1 (S1 to CC = 0001 binary).

With S1 – S4 configured to output Preset Speeds (F115 – F118), 0001 – 1111 may be applied to S1 – S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to run the associated Preset Speed. If bidirectional operation is required, F and R must be connected to CC, and Use Speed Modes must be enabled at F380.

With S1 being the least significant bit of a binary count, the S1 – S4 settings will produce the programmed speed settings as indicated in the Preset Speed Truth Table to the right.

Preset Speeds are also used in the Pattern Run mode.





Minimum — Lower Limit (F013)


Units — Hz

Preset Speed Truth Table.

Preset Speed #2


This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0010 and is identified as Preset Speed #2. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the Control Terminal Strip to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for further information on this parameter).







Units — Hz

PresetS4

MSBS3 S2

S1 LSB

Output

1 0 0 0 1 F0182 0 0 1 0 F0193 0 0 1 1 F0204 0 1 0 0 F0215 0 1 0 1 F0226 0 1 1 0 F0237 0 1 1 1 F0248 1 0 0 0 F2879 1 0 0 1 F28810 1 0 1 0 F28911 1 0 1 1 F29012 1 1 0 0 F29113 1 1 0 1 F29214 1 1 1 0 F29315 1 1 1 1 F294

Note: 1 = Terminal connected to CC.

PresetS4

MSBS3 S2

S1 LSB

Output

1 0 0 0 1 F0182 0 0 1 0 F0193 0 0 1 1 F0204 0 1 0 0 F0215 0 1 0 1 F0226 0 1 1 0 F0237 0 1 1 1 F0248 1 0 0 0 F2879 1 0 0 1 F28810 1 0 1 0 F28911 1 0 1 1 F29012 1 1 0 0 F29113 1 1 0 1 F29214 1 1 1 0 F29315 1 1 1 1 F294

Note: 1 = Terminal connected to CC.


F020 F100


Preset Speed #3









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #4









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #5









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #6









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #7









Units — Hz

Low Speed Signal Output Frequency

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Reach Settings

The Low Speed Signal Output Frequency parameter sets a frequency threshold that activates the assigned output terminal so long as the ASD output is at or above this setting (see Table 9 on pg. 82 for the available output assignments).





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz


F101 F102


Speed Reach Frequency


The Speed Reach Frequency sets a frequency threshold that, when reached or is within the bandwidth specified by parameter F102, will provide a signal at an output terminal that can close an appropriately configured output contact (see Table 9 on pg. 82 for the available output assignments).





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance


This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Speed Reach Frequency (F101) setting.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz


F103 F105


ST Signal Selection

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Special Functions

This parameter is used to set the operation of the Standby (ST) control terminal or any terminal configured as the ST terminal.

Settings:

ST-to-CC RequiredST-to-CC Not RequiredInterlock with F/R Terminal

The setting ST-to-CC Required enables the ASD for operation so long as the control terminal ST is connected to CC via a jumper, contact, or other means.

The ST-to-CC Not Required setting allows the ASD to operate without the ST-to-CC connection. The control terminal ST may be configured for other functions.

The Interlock with F/R Terminal setting configures the F (Forward) and R (Reverse) control terminals for the secondary function of Standby. Closing a set of contacts to either F or R will cause the ASD to accelerate the motor to the programmed setpoint of F or R. Opening the F and R contact will disable the ASD and the motor will coast to a stop. The control terminal ST may be configured for other functions.



Factory Default — ST – CC Required


R/F Priority Selection


The R/F Priority Selection determines the operation of the ASD if both the R and F control terminals are activated.

Settings:

ReverseSuspend

The waveforms below depict the motor response for all combinations of the F and R terminal settings if the Reverse option is chosen.

The Suspend setting will decelerate the motor to a stop regardless of the rotation direction when both the F and R control terminals are activated.



Factory Default — Reverse



F106 F107


Input Terminal Priority


This parameter is used to allow the Jog and DC Injection Braking input signals to control the ASD when received via the Control Terminal Strip even though the system is in the Local mode.

With this parameter enabled, a Jog command or a DC Injection Braking command received from the Control Terminal Strip will receive priority over commands from the EOI.

See F260 for further information on using the Jog function.

See F250 – F252 for further information on DC Injection Braking.

Settings:

Enabled (Box checked)Disabled





Extended Terminal Function


The Extended Terminal Function is used with the optional ASD-Multicom card only. This parameter defines the format of the binary or BCD data when using the option card.

Settings:

None12-Bit Binary16-Bit Binary3-Digit BCD4-Digit BCDReverse 12-Bit BinaryReverse 16-Bit BinaryReverse 3-Digit BCDReverse 4-Digit BCD

Selections using 16-bit binary or 4-digit BCD will require the configuration of terminals S1-S4 on the Control Terminal Strip as binary bits 0 – 3 (F115 – F118). The Frequency Mode #1 Selection (F004) must be set to Use Binary/BCD Input.

For proper scaling of the binary or BCD input, parameters F228 – F231 must be configured [BIN Reference Point #1, BIN Reference #1 (frequency), Bin Reference Point #2, and BIN Reference #2 (frequency)].






F108 F112


Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Motorized Pot Settings

When the Frequency Mode #1 Selection (F004) setting is set to Use MOP Function Simulation, this parameter determines the outcome of the Frequency Mode #1 setting at powerdown or stop.

Settings:

EraseStore

If Erase is selected, the ASD will not store the frequency setpoint and establishes a setpoint of 0.0 Hz when restarted.

If Store is selected, the ASD will maintain the current frequency setpoint in memory while stopped, during fault conditions, or when power is removed. This setpoint will be used as the initial frequency setpoint when the ASD is restarted.

A control terminal configured as MOP Frequency Clear will establish a frequency setpoint of 0.0 Hz regardless of the Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down setting.



Factory Default — Erase


ON Input Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Assignment ⇒ ON

This parameter selects the functionality of the virtual input terminal ON. As a virtual terminal, the ON control terminal exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True (or connected to CC) state.

It is often practical to assign this terminal to a function that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.

This parameter sets the programmable ON terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 77.



Factory Default — Unassigned


F Input Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Assignment ⇒ F

This parameter selects the functionality of the F input terminal.

In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed.

This parameter sets the programmable F terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 77.





R Input Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Assignment ⇒ R

This parameter selects the functionality of the R input terminal.


This parameter sets the programmable R terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 77.



Factory Default — Reverse



F113 F117


ST Input Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Assignment ⇒ ST

This parameter selects the functionality of the ST input terminal.


This parameter sets the programmable ST terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 77.



Factory Default — Standby


RES Input Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Assignment ⇒ RES

This parameter selects the functionality of the RES input terminal.


This parameter sets the programmable RES terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 77.



Factory Default — Reset


S1 Input Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Assignment ⇒ S1

This parameter selects the functionality of the S1 input terminal.


This parameter sets the programmable S1 terminal to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 77.



Factory Default — Preset Speed Cmd #1





















F118 F120









Factory Default — Emergency Off





Note: The S5 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom option board. Without the ASD-Multicom option board the S5 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset.


















F121 F123












Input Terminal 12 Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Assignment ⇒ 12

This parameter selects the functionality of the #12 input terminal.

Note: The #12 input terminal may be used without the ASD-Multicom option board. Without the ASD-Multicom option board the #12 terminal assignment information will be stored in volatile memory. The terminal assignment information will be lost if the system is powered down or reset.


This parameter sets the programmable terminal #12 to 1 of the 68 possible functions that are listed in Table 8 on pg. 77.
















F124 F126


































Table 8. Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions.

0 — Unassigned — No operation.

1 — F — Enables Forward operation commands.

2 — R — Enables Reverse operation commands.

3 — ST — Enables the Forward and Reverse operation commands (maybe disabled at F103).

4 — RES — Resets the device and any incurred faults.

5 — S1 —Preset Speed Command 1 is used as the LSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.

6 — S2 — Preset Speed Command 2 is used as the second bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.

7 — S3 — Preset Speed Command 3 is used as the third bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.

8 — S4 — Preset Speed Command 4 is used as the MSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.

9 — Jog — Jog is the term used to describe turning on the motor for small increments of time and is used when precise positioning of motor-driven equipment is required. This terminal activates a Jog for the duration of activation. The Jog settings may be configured at F260 and F261.

10 — Emergency Off — Terminates the output signal from the drive and may apply a brake. The braking method may be selected at F603.

11 — DC Braking — The drive outputs a DC current that is injected into the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor.

12 — Accel/Decel 1, 2 Switching — Acceleration and Deceleration control may be switched between the #1 profile to the #2 profile if using a multiple-accel/decel profile configuration.

13 — Accel/Decel 3, 4 Switching — Acceleration and Deceleration control may be switched between the #3 profile to the #4 profile if using a multiple-accel/decel profile configuration.

14 — Motor 1, 2 Switching — Motor control may be switched between the Motor #1 profile to the Motor #2 profile if using a multiple-motor profile configuration.

15 — Motor 3, 4 Switching — Motor control may be switched between the Motor #3 profile to the Motor #4 profile if using a multiple-motor profile configuration.

16 — Torque Limit 1, 2 Switching — Torque control may be switched between the Torque Limit #1 profile to the Torque Limit #2 profile if using a multiple-profile configuration.

17 — Torque Limit 3, 4 Switching — Torque control may be switched between the Torque Limit #3 profile to the Torque Limit #4 profile if using a multiple-profile configuration.

18 — PID Control Off — Connecting this terminal to CC turns off PID control.

19 — Pattern #1 — Connecting this terminal to CC initiates the Pattern #1 Pattern Run.




23 — Pattern Continue — Continues with the last Pattern Run from its stopping point when connected to CC.

24 — Pattern Trigger — This function is used to sequentially initiate each Preset Speed of a Pattern Run with each connection to CC.

25 — Forced Jog Forward — This setting initiates a Forced Forward Jog when connected to CC. The Forced Forward Jog command provides a forward-run signal so long as this terminal is connected to CC (the status of the F and R terminals is ignored). Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method.

26 — Forced Jog Reverse — This setting initiates a Forced Reverse Jog when connected to CC. The Forced Reverse Jog command provides a reverse-run signal so long as this terminal is connected to CC (the status of the F and R terminals is ignored). Use F260 to set the Jog Frequency and use F261 to select the Jog Stop Method.

27 — Binary Bit 0 — Bit 0 – 7 may be set up as a speed/torque control register. Speed/torque settings may be applied to this group of terminals in binary form. The required number of input terminals should be set to the respective binary bit settings (0 – MSB). The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Use Binary/BCD input.

The gain and bias of the binary input may be set from the following path: Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ BIN (see F228).



28 — Binary Bit 1 — See selection 27 above.







35 — Forced Stop — Activating this terminal terminates the Run command regardless of the Command Mode setting and initiates the programmed stopping method.

36 — Stop Key Emulation — Activating this terminal terminates the Run command being received from communications devices and initiates the programmed stopping method.

37 — Reserved — No operation.






43 — Binary Data Write — This terminal serves two functions:

1) While operating in the Use Binary/BCD input mode, each momentary connection of this terminal to CC transfers the speed/torque Binary Bit (0 – MSB) settings to the motor.

2) The Motorized Pot frequency command will be saved during power down or reset by setting F108 to Store and setting an input terminal to 43:binary Data Write. If the drive is running and the Binary Data Write terminal is active when an event occurs (Fault, Power off), the Motorized Pot frequency command will be restored upon power-up or reset.

44 — Motorized Pot Up (MOP) — Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes an increase in motor speed for the duration of the connection until the Upper Limit is reached. The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Motorized Pot. Simulation. The MOP acceleration rate is determined by the F500 setting.

45 — Motorized Pot Down (MOP) — Momentarily connecting this terminal to CC causes a decrease in motor speed for the duration of the connection until the Lower Limit is reached. The Frequency Mode setting must be set to Motorized Pot. Simulation. The MOP deceleration rate is determined by the F501 setting.

46 — Motorized Pot Clear — Connecting this terminal to CC clears the last Motorized Pot frequency settings (see F108 for further information on this setting).

47 — Momentary Push Run — When connected to CC this terminal setting starts the motor.

48 — Momentary Push Stop — When connected to CC this terminal setting stops the motor.

49 — Forward/Reverse — This setting operates in conjunction with another terminal being set to the Run/Stop (50) function. When configured to Run (Run/Stop to CC), the make or break of this connection to CC changes the direction of the motor.

50 — Run/Stop — This terminal enables the motor to run when connected to CC and disables the motor when the connection is broken.

51 — Line Power Bypass — This function operates in conjunction with the Line Power Switching frequency setting (F355). An enabled check box at Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching (At) and this input terminal setting enables this function.

Once configured (including this terminal connection to CC), the frequency setting of Line Power Switching (Hz) establishes the speed at which the drive terminates its output and routes commercial power to the motor.

Table 8. (Continued)Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions.



52 — Frequency Priority — Connecting this terminal to CC allows for the frequency control to be switched from the frequency command source selected as Frequency Mode #1 to Frequency Mode #2. This function is enabled by setting the Reference Priority Selection to Frequency Source Priority Switching and is located at Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Reference Priority Selection ⇒ Frequency Source Priority Switching.

53 — VI/II Terminal Priority — Connecting this terminal to CC assigns command control to the VI/II Terminal and overrides all other Control Terminal Strip input so long as the Command Mode is set to Use Control Terminal Strip.

54 — Command Control Terminal Strip Priority — Connecting this terminal to CC overrides the FMOD setting and assigns speed control to the Control Terminal Strip.

55 — Parameter Editing Enabling (LED) — The LED Keypad system is unavailable at the time of this release.

56 — Control Switch (torque, position) — This function allows for a system change from speed to torque or position as a function of the V/f setting when connected to CC.

57 — Deviation Counter Clear — This function clears the Deviation Counter while operating in the Position Control mode.

58 — Position Control Forward Limit LS — Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its position. If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip. This function is normally used for over-travel conditions.

59 — Position Control Reverse Limit LS — Connecting this terminal to CC will immediately stop the drive and hold its position. If the connection remains the drive will time out and trip. This function is normally used for over-travel conditions.

60 — Light-Load High-Speed Operation Enable — Activating this terminal sets the lower limit of an output frequency range in which the Light-load/High-speed function may be used (see F330). The Light-load/High-speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD to the speed setting established in F341 for the duration of the activation.

61 — Snap Stop Control Enable — TBD.

62 — Pre-excite Motor — Connecting this terminal to CC applies an excitation current to the motor (holds shaft stationary) for the duration of the connection.

63 — System Consistent Sequence (BC: braking command) — TBD.

64 — System Consistent Sequence (B: braking release) — Connecting this input terminal to CC initiates the brake release command. This setting requires that another discrete input terminal be set to 65 [System Consistent Sequence (BA: braking answer)] to complete the brake release command and to convey the status of the braking system to the user or to a dependent subsystem.

Once the braking release function is initiated, the Trouble Internal Timer begins to count down (Trouble Internal Timer value is set at F630). Should the count-down timer expire before the brake releases or before the Braking Answer is returned, fault E-11will occur. Otherwise, the brake releases the motor and normal motor operations resume.

The Braking Release function is primarily used at startup; but, may be used when the brake is applied while the motor is running.

65 — System Consistent Sequence (BA: braking answer) — This setting is required when the Braking Release (64) function is used. The function of this input terminal is to receive the returned the status of the braking system. The returned status is either Released or Not Released.

If Released is returned within the time setting of F630, normal system function resumes.

If Not Released is returned or if the F630 time setting times out before either signal is returned, then fault E-11 occurs.

The returned signal may also be used to notify the user or control a dependent subsystem.

66 — System Consistent Sequence (BT: braking test) — TBD.

67 — Output Frequency Hold — TBD.

Table 8. (Continued)Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections and Descriptions.


F130 F133


OUT1 Output Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Assignment ⇒ OUT1

This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT1 (A & C) output terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 82.

The on and off delay times of the OUT1 terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.

In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed.



Factory Default — Low


OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Assignment ⇒ OUT2

This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT2 (A & C) output terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 82.





Factory Default — RCH (Acc/Dec Complete)


FL Output Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Assignment ⇒ FL

This parameter sets the functionality of the FL output terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 82.

The on and off delay times of the FL terminals may be adjusted to provide more response time to the device that is connected to the output terminals.




Factory Default — Fault (All)


Output #4 Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Assignment ⇒ 4

This parameter sets the functionality of the OUT4 terminals to 1 of the 62 possible functions that are listed in Table 9 on pg. 82.





Factory Default — LL



F134 F140


OUT5 Terminal Assignment







Factory Default — UL









Factory Default — RCH (Specified Speed)









Factory Default — Overcurrent Prealarm


F Input Terminal Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒ F

This parameter delays the response of the ASD to any change in the F terminal input by the programmed value.

The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.





Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS



Table 9. Discrete Output Terminal Assignment Selections.

Function Function

0 Lower Limit (LL) 31 Ready for Operation (including ST and RUN)

1 Upper Limit (UL) 32 Ready for Operation

2 Low (speed setting of F100) 33 POFF Alarm (poor control power supply)

3 RCH (Acc/Dec completion) 34 System Consistent Sequence (BR: brake release)

4 RCH (speed specified at F101) 35 In Alarm Status

5 Fault FL (all) 36 Forward Speed Limit (torque control)

6 Fault FL (except EF or OCL) 37 Reverse Speed Limit (torque control)

7 Overcurrent Pre-alarm 38 ASD Healthy Output

8 ASD Overload Pre-alarm 39 Abnormal Communication Alarm 2 (internal cause)

9 Motor Pre-alarm 40 Error Code Output 1 (6-bit error output)

10 Overheat Pre-alarm 41 Error Code Output 2 (6-bit error output)

11 Overvoltage Pre-alarm 42 Error Code Output 3 (6-bit error output)

12 DC Voltage Low Alarm 43 Error Code Output 4 (6-bit error output)

13 Low-current Alarm 44 Error Code Output 5 (6-bit error output)

14 Overtorque Alarm 45 Error Code Output 6 (6-bit error output)

15 Braking Resistor Overload Pre-alarm 46 Designated Data Output 1 (7-bit transmission output)

16 In Emergency Off 47 Designated Data Output 2 (7-bit transmission output)

17 Retrying 48 Designated Data Output 3 (7-bit transmission output)

18 Pattern Operation Switching Out 49 Designated Data Output 4 (7-bit transmission output)

19 PID Deviation Limit 50 Designated Data Output 5 (7-bit transmission output)

20 Start/Stop 51 Designated Data Output 6 (7-bit transmission output)

21Serious Fault (OCA, OCL, EF, Lost Phase, Short Circuit, or Abnormal Output)

52 Designated Data Output 7 (7-bit transmission output)

22 Light Fault (OL, OC1, 2, 3, OP) 53 Light Load Detection Signal

23 Bypass Output #1 54 Heavy Load Detection Signal

24 Bypass Output #2 55 Positive Torque Limit

25 Fan On/Off 56 Negative Torque Limit

26 Jogging 57 External Rush Suppression Relay Output

27 Control Terminal Strip Operation Command Mode 58 Over Travel

28 Total-operation-hours Alarm 59 Positioning Completion

29 Abnormal Communication Alarm (external cause) 60 Earth Fault Alarm

30 Forward/Reverse Operation 61 Low Output Disable Alarm


F141 F145


R Input Terminal Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒ R

This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the R terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

ST Input Terminal Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒ ST

This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the ST terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

RES Input Terminal Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒ RES

This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the RES terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

S1 – S4 Input Terminal Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒ S1 – S4

This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the S1 – S4 terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

S5 – S16 Input Terminal Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminal Delays ⇒ S5 – S16

This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the S5 – S16 terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS


F150 F154


OUT1 On Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays ⇒ OUT1

Once the condition is met to close the OUT1 (A & C) output terminals, this parameter delays the closing of the terminals by the programmed value.

For example, if the OUT1 function is programmed as Overtorque Alarm, OUT1 will close 2.0 mS (the default value for OUT1 On Delay) after the overtorque condition occurs.

The delay may be increased to prevent relay chatter.





Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT2 On Delay


This parameter delays the closing of the OUT2 (A & C) output terminals by the programmed value (see waveforms at F150).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

FL On Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays ⇒ FL

This parameter delays the closing of the FL output terminals by the programmed value (see waveforms at F150).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT4 On Delay


This parameter delays the closing of the OUT4 output terminals by the programmed value (see waveforms at F150).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT5 On Delay








Minimum — 2.0Maximum — 200.0Units — mS


F155 F162


OUT6 On Delay








Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT7 On Delay








Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT1 Off Delay


This parameter delays the opening of the OUT1 (A & C) output terminals by the programmed value.

The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to OUT1 to respond.





Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT2 Off Delay


This parameter delays the opening of the OUT2 (A & C) output terminals by the programmed value (see waveforms at F160).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

FL Off Delay

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Output Terminal Delays ⇒ FL

This parameter delays the opening of the FL output terminals by the programmed value (see waveforms at F160).

The delay may be increased to allow the devices that are connected to FL to respond.





Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS


F163 F170


OUT4 Off Delay


This parameter delays the opening of the OUT4 output terminals by the programmed value (see waveforms at F160).






Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT5 Off Delay








Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT6 Off Delay








Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS

OUT7 Off Delay








Minimum — 2.0

Maximum — 200.0

Units — mS


Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Set #2

The Motor #2 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The #2 Maximum Output Voltage is set at F171.

This parameter is used only when the parameters for motor set #2 are configured and selected. Motor set #2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal.

For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the name-plated frequency of the motor.





Minimum — 25.0

Maximum — 299.0

Units — Hz


F171 F174


Motor #2 Max Output Voltage


The Motor #2 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor #2 output voltage at the Base Frequency (F170). Regardless of the programmed value, the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.

The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting (F307).






Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 600.0

Units — Volts



The Motor #2 Torque Boost function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below ½ of the #2 Base Frequency setting (F170).

See parameter F016 (Motor #1 Torque Boost) for an explanation of torque boost.






Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 30.0

Units — %

Electronic Thermal Protection #2


The Motor #2 Electronic Thermal Protection parameter specifies the motor overload current level for motor set #2. This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.

The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (V/A) or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).

Electronic Thermal Protection settings (#1 – #4) will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to V/A rather than %.





Minimum — 10.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %



The Motor #3 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Maximum Output Voltage is set at F175.







Minimum — 25.0

Maximum — 299.0

Units — Hz


F175 F178











Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 600.0

Units — Volts










Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 30.0

Units — %










Minimum — 10.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %



The Motor #4 Base Frequency setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Maximum Output Voltage is set at F179.







Minimum — 25.0

Maximum — 299.0

Units — Hz


F179 F183











Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 600.0

Units — Volts










Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 30.0

Units — %










Minimum — 10.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

V/f Adjustment Coefficient

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ V/f Adjustment Coefficient

This parameter may be used in the Constant Torque or the Variable Torque modes only and should be adjusted gradually to improve the application-specific torque requirements. The Torque Boost setting (F016) may be adjusted to improve the low-frequency torque performance.

Note: The Torque Boost setting should be adjusted gradually before attempting performance corrections using this parameter.





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 255


F190 F193


Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ V/f Five-Point Setting

The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency setting establishes the frequency that is to be associated with the voltage setting of F191 (Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage).

The V/f five-point settings define a custom volts per hertz relationship for the startup output of the ASD.

To enable this function, set the V/f Pattern (F015) selection to Custom V/f Curve.

Custom V/f Curves may be useful in starting high inertia loads such as rotary drum vacuum filters.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 299

Units — Hz

Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage


The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F190 (Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency).

See F190 for additional information on custom V/f curves.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %



The Custom V/f Five Point Setting #2 Frequency sets the frequency to be associated with parameter F193 (Custom V/f Five Point Setting #2 Voltage).






Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 299

Units — Hz



The Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Voltage establishes the percentage of the output voltage that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F192 (Custom V/f Five Point Setting #2 Frequency).






Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %


F194 F199










Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 299

Units — Hz









Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %









Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 299

Units — Hz









Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %









Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 299

Units — Hz









Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %


F200 F200


Reference Priority Selection

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Reference Priority Selection

Either Frequency Mode #1 or Frequency Mode #2 may control the output frequency of the ASD. This parameter determines which of the two will control the output frequency and the conditions in which control will be switched from one to the other.

Settings:

Frequency Source #1Frequency Source #2Frequency Source #1 PriorityFrequency Source #2 PriorityFrequency Source Priority Switching

The Frequency Source #1 or #2 setting specifies the source of the input frequency command signal. These settings are performed in F004 and F207, respectively.

If Frequency Source #1 is selected here, the ASD will follow the settings of F004. If Frequency Source #2 is selected here, the ASD will follow the settings of F207.

The Frequency Source #1 Priority and Frequency Source #2 Priority selections are used in conjunction with the Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency setting (F208). Parameter F208 establishes a threshold frequency that will be used as a reference when determining when to switch output control between the Frequency Mode #1 setting and the Frequency Mode #2 setting.

If Frequency Source #1 Priority is selected here and the commanded frequency of Frequency Source #1exceeds the F208 setting, the Frequency Mode #1 setting has priority over the Frequency Mode #2 setting.

If Frequency Source #2 Priority is selected here and the commanded frequency of Frequency Source #2 exceeds the F208 setting, the Frequency Mode #2 setting has priority over Frequency Mode #1 setting.

Frequency Source Priority Switching allows for a preconfigured input terminal to activate Frequency Source #1 or Frequency Source #2. Any unused programmable discrete input terminals may be programmed as the Frequency Priority switching terminal.



Factory Default — Frequency Source #1



F201 F201


VI/II Speed Reference #1

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ VI/II

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminal when the VI/II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

Note: See note on pg. 47 for further information on the VI/II terminal.

VI/II Input Speed Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the VI/II input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ VI/II.

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode ⇒ Use Control Terminal Strip.

• Set VI/II Speed Reference #1 (F201) — the input signal level that represents VI/II Speed Frequency #1.

• Set VI/II Speed Frequency #1 (F202).

• Set VI/II Speed Reference #2 (F203) — the input signal level that represents VI/II Speed Frequency #2.

• Set VI/II Speed Frequency #2 (F204).

• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).

Once set, as the VI input voltage or the II current changes, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets VI/II Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of VI/II Speed Frequency #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.

VI/II Input Torque Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input at the VI/II input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ VI/II.


• Set VI/II Speed Reference #1 (F201) — the input signal level that represents VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1.

• Set VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (F205).

• Set VI/II Speed Reference #2 (F203) — the input signal level that represents VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2.

• Set VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (F206).


Once set, as the VI input voltage or the II current changes, the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets VI/II Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1 while operating in the Torque Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Frequency Settings

Note: The default value for parameter F201 is 20%. The II input is commonly used for the 4 – 20 mA current loop signal where 4 mA equals 20% of a 20 mA signal. If the VI input is used (0 – 10 VDC input), this parameter may be changed to 0.0% (of the input signal).

Note: The speed control response may be further trimmed by adjusting the Bias and Gain settings.

Torque Settings


F202 F205


VI/II Speed Frequency #1


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminal when the VI/II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See VI/II Speed Reference #1 (F201) for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets VI/II Speed Frequency #1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of VI/II Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

VI/II Speed Reference #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminal when the VI/II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

See VI/II Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control.

This parameter sets the VI/II input level that is associated with VI/II Speed Frequency #2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

VI/II Speed Frequency #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminal when the VI/II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See VI/II Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control.

This parameter sets the output frequency that is associated with VI/II Speed Reference #2 setting while operating in the Speed control mode.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ VI/II

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminal when the VI/II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given VI/II input level.

See VI/II Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of VI/II Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %


F206 F208


VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ VI/II

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the VI/II input terminal when the VI/II terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given VI/II input level.

See VI/II Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of VI/II Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %

Frequency Mode #2

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection

This parameter selects the source of the frequency command signal to be used as Frequency Mode #2 in the event that Frequency Mode #1 is disabled or if Frequency Mode #2 is set up as the primary control parameter. See F004 and F200 for additional information on this setting.

Settings:

Use VI/IIUse RRUse RXUse Option Card RX2Use LED Keypad OptionUse Binary/BCD InputUse Common Serial (TTL)Use RS232/RS485Use Communication CardUse Motorized Pot. SimulationUse Pulse Input Option



Factory Default — VI/II


Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency

Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency

This parameter sets the threshold frequency that will be used in F200 to determine if Frequency Source #1 or #2 will control the output of the ASD.

See F200 for additional information on this setting.





Minimum — 0.1


Units — Hz


F209 F209


Analog Input Filter

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Analog Filter

Analog filtering is applied after the analog reference signal is converted to a digital signal. The type of filtering used is Rolling Average over time.

Settings:

NoneSmallMediumLarge

The analog input signal is sampled and converted to a digital signal. With no filtering applied, the digital value from the conversion is scaled for use by the microprocessor of the ASD.

If the filtering selection is Small, the ASD averages the last 5 sampled (digital) values. The rolling average is updated (every 4 µS) and scaled for use by the microprocessor.

If the filtering selection is Medium, the ASD averages the last 20 sampled (digital) values. The rolling average is updated (every 4 µS) and scaled for use by the microprocessor.

If the filtering selection is Large, the ASD averages the last 50 sampled (digital) values. The rolling average is updated (every 4 µS) and scaled for use by the microprocessor.

False responses to electrical noise are eliminated with no loss in bandwidth because the value used by the drive is the average value of several samples.






F210 F210


RR Speed Reference #1

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RR

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

RR Input Speed Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RR input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ RR.


• Set RR Speed Reference #1 (F210) — the input signal level that represents RR Speed Frequency #1.

• Set RR Speed Frequency #1 (F211).

• Set RR Speed Reference #2 (F212) — the input signal level that represents RR Speed Frequency #2.

• Set RR Speed Frequency #2 (F213).


Once set, as the RR input changes, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets RR Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RR Speed Frequency #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.

RR Input Torque Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input at the RR input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ RR.


• Set RR Speed Reference #1 (F210) — the input signal level that represents RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1.

• Set RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (F214).

• Set RR Speed Reference #2 (F212) — the input signal level that represents RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2.

• Set RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (F215).


Once set, as the RR input changes, the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets RR Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1 while operating in the Torque Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Frequency Settings


Torque Settings


F211 F214


RR Speed Frequency #1


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See RR Speed Reference #1 (F210) for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RR Speed Frequency #1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

RR Speed Reference #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

See RR Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control.

This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with RR Speed Frequency #2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

RR Speed Frequency #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See RR Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control.

This parameter sets RR Speed Frequency #2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Speed Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RR

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RR input level.

See RR Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RR Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %


F215 F215


RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RR

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RR input level.

See RR Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of RR Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %


F216 F216


RX Speed Reference #1

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RX

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

RX Input Speed Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ RX.


• Set RX Speed Reference #1 (F216) — the input signal level that represents RX Speed Frequency #1.

• Set RX Speed Frequency #1 (F217).

• Set RX Speed Reference #2 (F218) — the input signal level that represents RX Speed Frequency #2.

• Set RX Speed Frequency #2 (F219).


Once set, as the RX input changes, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets RX Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Frequency #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.

RX Input Torque Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input at the RX input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ RX.


• Set RX Speed Reference #1 (F216) — the input signal level that represents RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1.

• Set RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (F220).

• Set RX Speed Reference #2 (F218) — the input signal level that represents RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2.

• Set RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (F221).


Once set, as the RX input changes, the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets RX Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1 while operating in the Torque Control mode.





Minimum — -100.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Frequency Settings


Torque Settings


F217 F220


RX Speed Frequency #1


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See RX Speed Reference #1 (F216) for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RX Speed Frequency #1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.





Minimum — -Max. Freq. (F011)


Units — Hz

RX Speed Reference #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

See RX Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control.

This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Speed Frequency #2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -100.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

RX Speed Frequency #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See RX Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control.

This parameter sets RX Speed Frequency #2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Speed Control mode.







Units — Hz

RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX input level.

See RX Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -250.00

Maximum — 250.00

Units — %


F221 F221


RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX input level.

See RX Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of RX Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -250.00

Maximum — 250.00

Units — %


F222 F222


RX2 Speed Reference #1

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RX2

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

RX2 Input Speed Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX2 input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ RX2.


• Set RX2 Speed Reference #1 (F222) — the input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Frequency #1.

• Set RX2 Speed Frequency #1 (F223).

• Set RX2 Speed Reference #2 (F224) — the input signal level that represents RX2 Speed Frequency #2.

• Set RX2 Speed Frequency #2 (F225).


Once set, as the RX2 input changes, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Frequency #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.

RX2 Input Torque Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque control input at the RX2 input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ RX2.


• Set RX2 Speed Reference #1 (F222) — the input signal level that represents RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1.

• Set RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (F226).

• Set RX2 Speed Reference #2 (F224) — the input signal level that represents RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2.

• Set RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (F227).


Once set, as the RX2 input changes, the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets RX2 Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal level that is associated with the setting of RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1 while operating in the Torque Control mode.





Minimum — -100.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Frequency Settings


Torque Settings


F223 F226


RX2 Speed Frequency #1


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See RX2 Speed Reference #1 (F222) for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RX2 Speed Frequency #1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.







Units — Hz

RX2 Speed Reference #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

See RX2 Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control.

This parameter sets the RX2 input level that is associated with RX2 Speed Frequency #2 while operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -100.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

RX2 Speed Frequency #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See RX2 Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control.

This parameter sets RX2 Speed Frequency #2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Speed Control mode.







Units — Hz

RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX2

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX2 input level.

See RX2 Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX2 Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -250.00

Maximum — 250.00

Units — %


F227 F227


RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ RX2

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 input terminal when the RX2 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX2 input level.

See RX2 Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of RX2 Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -250.00

Maximum — 250.00

Units — %


F228 F228


BIN Speed Reference #1

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ BIN

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

BIN Input Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input at the binary input terminals:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ Use Binary/BCD Input.


• Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminals; select and set the desired discrete input terminals to Binary Bit(s) 0 – 7 (or 0 – MSB) (see Table 8 on pg. 77). The binary input can control the direction, speed, and/or torque of the motor.

Note: 255D is the decimal equivalent of the 8-bit BIN word with all input

terminals set to one (255 decimal = 11111111 binary).

BIN Speed Control Setup

• Set BIN Speed Reference #1 (F228) — the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency #1.

• Set BIN Speed Frequency #1 (F229).

• Set BIN Speed Reference #2 (F230) — the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency #2.

• Set BIN Speed Frequency #2 (F231).


Once set, as the binary input signal changes, the output signal of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Frequency #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.

BIN Torque Control Setup

• Set BIN Speed Reference #1 (F228) — the input signal level that represents BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1.

• Set BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1 (F232).

• Set BIN Speed Reference #2 (F230) — the input signal level that represents BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2.

• Set BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2 (F233).


Once set, as the binary input signal changes, the output signal of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference #1 and is the input signal that is associated with the setting of BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1 while operating in the Torque Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Frequency Settings

Torque Settings


F229 F232


BIN Speed Frequency #1


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

This parameter sets BIN Speed Frequency #1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See BIN Speed Reference #1 (F228) for further information on this setting.







Units — Hz

BIN Speed Reference #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.

See BIN Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control or Torque control.

This parameter sets BIN Speed Reference #2 and is the input signal that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Frequency #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode or is associated with the BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

BIN Speed Frequency #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.

This parameter sets BIN Speed Frequency #2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.

See BIN Speed Reference #1 (F228) for further information on this setting.







Units — Hz

BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ BIN

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given binary input signal.

See BIN Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1 and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of BIN Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -250.0

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %


F233 F234


BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Setpoints ⇒ BIN

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the binary input when the discrete input terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode.

This is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given binary input signal.

See BIN Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2 and is the output torque value that is associated with setting of BIN Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Torque control mode.





Minimum — -250.0

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %

PG Speed Reference #1

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ PG

This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal when a shaft-mounted encoder is used as the feedback transducer while operating in the Speed Control mode.

Note: The ASD – Multicom Option Board and the HS35 Encoder is required for system operation using the PG input speed control.

PG Input Speed Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the PG input terminal:

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Frequency Mode #1 ⇒ Pulse Input Option.

• Program ⇒ Fundamental Parameters ⇒ Standard Mode Selection ⇒ Command Mode ⇒ (any setting).

• Set PG Speed Reference #1 (F234) — the input pulse count rate that represents PG Speed Frequency #1.

• Set PG Speed Frequency #1 (F235).

• Set PG Speed Reference #2 (F236) — the input pulse count rate that represents PG Speed Frequency #2.

• Set PG Speed Frequency #2 (F237).


Once set, as the PG pulse count rate changes, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets PG Speed Reference #1 and is the input pulse count rate that is associated with the setting of PG Speed Frequency #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.





Minimum — -100.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Frequency Settings


F235 F240


PG Speed Frequency #1



See PG Speed Reference #1 (F234) for further information on this setting.

This parameter sets PG Speed Frequency #1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Speed Reference #1 while operating in the Speed Control mode.







Units — Hz

PG Speed Reference #2



See PG Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control.

This parameter sets the PG input level that is associated with PG Speed Frequency #2 while operating in the Speed control mode.





Minimum — -100.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

PG Speed Frequency #2



See PG Speed Reference #1 for further information on this setting when used for Speed control.

This parameter sets PG Speed Frequency #2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Speed Reference #2 while operating in the Speed Control mode.







Units — Hz

Startup Frequency

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Frequency Control

The output of the drive will remain at 0.0 Hz until the programmed speed value exceeds this setting during startup. Once exceeded during startup, the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the programmed setting.

Output frequencies below the Startup Frequency will not be output from the drive during startup. However, once reaching the Startup Frequency, speed values below the Startup Frequency may be output from the drive.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 10.0

Units — Hz


F241 F244


Run Frequency


This parameter establishes a center frequency (Run Frequency) of a frequency band.

Parameter F242 provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency; thus, establishing a frequency band.

During acceleration, the drive will not output a signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached.

During deceleration, the drive will continue to output the programmed deceleration output signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached; at which time the output will go to 0.0 Hz.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

Run Frequency Hysteresis


This parameter provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency setting (F241).





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 30.0

Units — Hz

End Frequency


This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the drive will recognize during deceleration before the drive goes to 0.0 Hz.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 30.0

Units — Hz

0 Hz Dead Band Signal

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ Dead Band of 0 Hz Frequency

This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, until the commanded frequency surpasses this setting, the ASD will output 0 Hz to the motor.

Note: This setting will override the Startup Frequency setting (F240) if this setting has a higher value.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 5.0

Units — Hz


F250 F253


DC Injection Braking Start Frequency

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ DC Braking

During deceleration this is the frequency at which DC Injection braking will start.

DC Injection Braking

DC Injection Braking is a braking system used with three-phase motors. Unlike conventional brakes, there is no physical contact between the rotating shaft and a stationary brake pad or drum. When braking is required, the drive outputs a DC current that is applied to the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor. The braking current stops when the time entered in F252 times out.

The intensity of the DC current used while braking determines how fast the motor will come to a stop and may be set at F251. The intensity setting is entered as a percentage of the full load current of the ASD.

DC Injection Braking is also used to preheat the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely when the motor is off by providing a pulsating DC current into the motor at the Carrier Frequency. This feature may be enabled at F254.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 120.0

Units — Hz

DC Injection Braking Current


This parameter sets the percentage of the rated current of the drive that will be used for DC Injection braking. A larger load will require a higher setting.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

DC Injection Braking Time


This parameter is used to set the on-time duration of the DC Injection Braking.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds

Motor Shaft Fixing Control


This parameter determines if DC Injection braking is to be used during a change in the direction of the motor.

Settings:

Box checked (Enabled)Box not checked (Disabled)






F254 F255


Motor Shaft Stationary Control


This parameter Enables/Disables a continuous DC injection at half of the amperage setting of F251 into a stopped motor. This feature is useful in preheating the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely.

Motor Shaft Stationary Control starts after the DC injection brake stops the motor and continues until ST – CC is opened, power is turned off, receiving an Emergency Off command, or this parameter is changed.

Enabling this feature will also require a non-zero entry at F250.

Settings:






0 Hz Command Function

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ Dead Band of 0 Hz Frequency

This parameter selects the go-to-zero method to be used by the ASD when the ASD is commanded to go to zero Hz.

Settings:

Standard (DC Injection Braking)0 Hz Command



Factory Default — Standard (DC Injection Braking)



F260 F260


Jog Run Frequency

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings

This parameter sets the output frequency of the drive during a Jog. Jogging is the term used to describe turning the motor on for small increments of time and is used when precise positioning of motor-driven equipment is required.

Enabling the Jog Window allows for the Manual Jog window to be among the screens accessed during repeated MON/PRG entries. This screen must be displayed when Jogging using the EOI.

The Jog function may be initiated from the EOI or remotely via the Control Terminal Strip or using Communications (for further information on using Communications for Jogging, see the Communications manual).

To perform a Jog, set this parameter (F260) to the desired Jog frequency.

Select a Jog Stop method (F261).

Jog Setup Using the EOI

To initiate a Jog from the EOI perform the following:

1. Place a check in the Enable Jog Window box (Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings ⇒ Enable Jog Window).

Note: The Jog Window must be displayed on the EOI to perform the Jog function using the EOI.

2. Press MON/PRG to access the Jog Window.

3. Using the Up/Down arrow keys of the EOI, select Reverse or Forward.

4. Place the system in the Local mode (Local/Remote LED is on).

5. Press and hold the Run key for the desired Jog duration.

Jog Setup Using the Control Terminal Strip

To initiate a Jog from the Control Terminal Strip perform the following:

1. Assign a discrete input terminal to the Jog function (see Table 8 on pg. 77).

2. Assign a discrete input terminal to the F (Forward) function (and Reverse if required) (see Table 8 on pg. 77).

3. Provide a Forward and/or Reverse command from the Control Terminal Strip.

4. From the Jog Window, use the Up/Down arrow keys of the EOI to select Reverse or Forward (Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings ⇒ Enable Jog Window). Press MON/PRG to access the Jog Window.

5. Place the system in the Remote mode (Local/Remote LED is off).

6. Connect the assigned Jog terminal (from step 1) to CC for the desired Jog duration.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 20.00

Units — Hz


F261 F273


Jog Stop Control

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Jog Settings

This parameter sets the stopping method used while operating in the Jog mode.

Settings:

Deceleration StopCoast StopDC Injection Braking Stop



Factory Default — Deceleration Stop


Jump Frequency #1

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies

In conjunction with parameter F271, this parameter establishes a user-defined frequency range: the Jump Frequency and a plus-or-minus value. During acceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the frequency of the lower level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed acceleration ramp reaches the upper level of the Jump Frequency range. Then, the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the upper level of the Jump Frequency range and continue upward as programmed.

During deceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the frequency of the upper level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed deceleration ramp reaches the lower level of the Jump Frequency range. Then, the output frequency of the drive will decelerate to the lower level of the Jump Frequency range and continue downward as programmed.

Once set up and enabled, it is on in all control modes.

User-selected frequencies may be jumped to avoid the negative effects of mechanical resonance.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

Jump Frequency #1 Bandwidth


This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #1 (see F270).





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 30.00

Units — Hz

Jump Frequency #2


Same as Jump Frequency #1 (F270) and is used when multiple frequencies are to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F273). When multiple jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz



This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #2 (F272).





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 30.0

Units — Hz


F274 F288


Jump Frequency #3


Same as Jump Frequency #1 (F270) and is used when multiple frequencies are to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F275). When multiple jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz



This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency #3 (F274).





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 30.0

Units — Hz

Jump Frequency Processing

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Jump Frequencies ⇒ Jump Frequency Processing

This parameter determines if the output frequency of the ASD or the PID feedback signal will be used as a reference for determining the Jump Frequency range.

See F270 for further information on the Jump Frequency settings.

Settings:

Process Amount (use PID feedback)Output Frequency



Factory Default — Process Amount


Preset Speed #8









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #9









Units — Hz


F289 F294


Preset Speed #10









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #11









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #12









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #13









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #14









Units — Hz

Preset Speed #15









Units — Hz


F300 F301


PWM Carrier Frequency

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Carrier Frequency

This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation signal applied to the motor.

Note: The carrier frequency must be 2.2 kHz or above except while operating in the Constant Torque, Variable Torque, or the 5-Point Setting modes.

Note: The maximum Carrier Frequency setting allowed is 5.0 kHz for the following ASDs: 230-volt ⇒ 75 HP – 150 HP. 460-volt ⇒ 150 HP – 350 HP. 600-volt ⇒ 150 HP – 300 HP. The maximum Carrier Frequency setting allowed for all other ASDs is 15 kHz.

Setting the Carrier Frequency above the Derate Threshold frequency (as listed below) for a given ASD will reduce the capability of the ASD.





Minimum — 0.500

Maximum — (ASD-dependent)

Units — kHz

Example

Break/Make ST

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Retry/Restart

This parameter Enables/Disables the ability of the drive to start into a spinning motor when the ST – CC connection opens momentarily and is then closed (Break/Make ST) or after a power interruption (momentary power failure). This parameter also Enables/Disables F312 and F313.

Settings:






Carrier-Frequency Derate Threshold Frequency

Derate Threshold Frequency

2.2 kHz 5.0 kHz 6.0 kHz 8.0 kHz

V T 1 3 0 H 7 U

2750B – 215KB 2500B 6160B 2010B – 2600B

2750B – 215KB 2600B 6400B 2400B

415KB – 435KB 4400B 6400B 4015B – 4330B

415KB – 435KB 412KB 4500B – 410KB

615KB – 635KB 410KB 4600B – 4750B

412KB 6015B – 6120B

610KB 6220B – 6330B

610KB 6220B – 6330B

612KB 6500B – 6750B

6500B – 6750B


F302 F303


Ridethrough Mode

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Undervoltage/Ridethrough

This parameter determines the motor-control response of the drive in the event of a momentary power outage.

Settings:

OffRidethroughStop



Factory Default — Off


Number of Retries


After a trip has occurred, this parameter sets the number of times that an automatic system restart is attempted for a qualified trip.

The trip conditions listed below will not initiate the automatic Retry/Restart function:

• U, V, W phase short circuit,

• DBR Resistor Overcurrent,

• Input Phase Loss (Input Phase Failure),

• Output Phase Loss (Output Phase Failure),

• Overcurrent During Acceleration (Startup Overcurrent),

• Earth Fault (Ground Fault),

• EMG (Emergency Off),

• EEPROM Data Fault (EEPROM Fault),

• Flash Memory/Gate Array/RAM-ROM Fault,

• CPU Fault,

• Communication Error,

• Option Fault,

• Output Current Protection Fault,

• Sink/Source Setting Error,

• Overspeed Error, or

• Key Error.

See the section titled General Safety Information on pg. 1 for further information on this setting.





Minimum — 00

Maximum — 10


F304 F306


Dynamic Braking Enable

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Dynamic Braking

This parameter Enables/Disables the Dynamic Braking system.

Settings:

Enabled with OverloadDisabled

Dynamic Braking

Dynamic Braking uses the inertial energy of the load to produce a braking force or it may be used to reduce the bus voltage in an attempt to preclude an overvoltage trip during deceleration. The inertial energy of the load drives the rotor and induces a current into the stator of the motor.

The induced stator current (energy) is dissipated through a resistive load. The resistive load is connected across terminals PA and PB (non-polarized). Using a low-value, high-wattage resistance as a load for the generated current, the resistive load dissipates the induced energy. The dissipated energy is the energy that would otherwise have caused the rotor to continue to rotate.

Dynamic Braking helps to slow the load quickly; it cannot act as a holding brake.

The Dynamic Braking function may be setup and enabled by connecting a braking resistor from terminal PA to PB of the drive and providing the proper information at F304, F308, and F309.

For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given application contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department.





Overvoltage Stall

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall

This parameter Enables/Disables the Overvoltage Stall function. When enabled, this function causes the drive to extend the decel time when the DC bus voltage increases due to transient voltage spikes, regeneration, supply voltage out of specification, etc. in an attempt to reduce the bus voltage.

Settings:

EnabledDisabledEnabled (Forced Shorted Deceleration)



Factory Default — Enabled




This parameter sets the maximum value of the output voltage of the drive. The Motor #1 Maximum Output Voltage is the Motor #1 output voltage at the Base Frequency (F014). Regardless of the programmed value, the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.




Factory Default — (ASD dependent)


Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 600.0

Units — Volts


F307 F311


Supply Voltage Compensation

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Base Frequency Voltage

This parameter Enables/Disables the Voltage Compensation function. This function provides an output waveform adjustment that compensates for changes in the input voltage.

Settings:






Dynamic Braking Resistance


This parameter is used to input the resistive value of the Dynamic Braking Resistor.

For additional information on selecting the proper resistance value for a given application contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department.

Note: Using a resistor value that is too low may result in system damage.





Minimum — 1.0

Maximum — 1000.0

Units — Ω

Dynamic Braking Resistance Capacity


This parameter is used to input the wattage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor.

For additional information on selecting the proper resistor wattage value for a given application contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department.

Note: Using a resistor with a wattage rating that is too low may result in system damage.





Minimum — 0.01

Maximum — 600.0

Units — kW

Ridethrough Time


In the event of a momentary power outage, this parameter determines the length of the Ridethrough time. During a Ridethrough, regenerative energy is used to maintain the control circuitry settings; it is not used to drive the motor.

The Ridethrough will be maintained for the number of seconds set using this parameter.

Note: The actual Ridethrough Time is load-dependent.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 320.0

Units — Seconds

Disable Forward Run/Disable Reverse Run

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Forward/Reverse Disable

This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode.

If either direction is disabled (box checked), commands received for the disabled direction will not be recognized.

If both directions are disabled (both boxes checked), the received direction command will determine the direction of the motor rotation.

Settings:

DisabledEnabled






F312 F315


Scan Rate


In the event of a momentary power outage, the output signal of the drive will cease. Upon restoration of power, the drive will output a low-level signal that will be used to determine the rotation speed of the rotor.

The low-level signal will start scanning the motor at FH and decrease until it reaches 0.0 Hz or it matches the signal produced by the turning rotor. Once the rate of rotation is determined, the drive will provide the normal output to engage the motor from its present speed.

This parameter determines the rate at which the scanning signal goes from FH to 0.0 Hz. See F301 for additional information on this parameter.





Minimum — 0.50

Maximum — 2.50

Lock-on Rate


After a momentary power outage, the ASD may have to startup into a spinning motor. The Lock On Rate is the difference between the time that the RPM of the motor is determined by the ASD and the time that the ASD outputs a drive signal to the motor.

See F301 for additional information on this parameter.





Minimum — 0.50

Maximum — 2.50

Search Method


In the event of a momentary power outage, this parameter may be used to set the starting point (frequency) of the scanning signal that is used to determine the rotor speed or this parameter may be used to select the method used to search for the speed of the rotor. See F301 and F312 for additional information on this parameter.

Settings:

NormalStart from 0.0 HzStart from Running FrequencyOption Board (ASD-SS)PG



Factory Default — Normal


Search Inertia


After a momentary power loss or the momentary loss of the ST-to-CC connection, this parameter sets the time for the commanded torque to reach its programmed setting during the automatic restart. This function is in effect so long as the Retry/Restart feature is enabled at F301.

Settings:

0.5 Sec. (fast)1.0 Sec. (standard)1.5 Sec.2.0 Sec.2.5 Sec.3.0 Sec.3.5 Sec.4.0 Sec.4.5 Sec.5.0 Sec. (slow)





Units — Seconds


F320 F324


Drooping Gain

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control

This parameter sets the effective 100% output torque level while operating in the Drooping Control mode. This value is the upper torque limit of the motor being driven by a given ASD while operating in the Drooping Control mode.

Drooping

Drooping Control, also called Load Share, is used to share the load among two or more mechanically coupled motors. Unlike Stall, which reduces the output frequency in order to limit the load once the load reaches a preset level, Drooping can decrease or increase the V/f setting of a motor to maintain a balance between the output torque levels of mechanically coupled motors.

Because of variances in gearboxes, sheaves, belts, motors, and since the speed of the motor is constrained by the mechanical system, one motor may experience more load than its counterpart and may become overloaded. Drooping Control allows the overloaded motor to slow down, thus shedding load and encouraging a lightly-loaded motor to pick up the slack. The goal of Drooping Control is to have the same torque ratios for mechanically coupled motors.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Speed at Drooping Gain 0%


This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 0% output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the lowest speed that Drooping will be in effect for motors that share the same load.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 320.0

Units — Hz

Speed at Drooping Gain 100%


This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 100% output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the speed of the individual motors at the 100% Drooping Gain setting for motors that share the same load.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 320.0

Units — Hz

Drooping Insensitive Torque Range


This parameter defines a torque range in which the Drooping Control settings will be ignored and the programmed torque settings will be followed.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Drooping Output Filter


This parameter is used to set the rate of output change allowed while operating in the Drooping Control mode.

Jerky operation may be decreased by increasing this setting.





Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 200.0


F325 F330


Load Inertia (Acc/Dec Torque)

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control ⇒ Load Inertia

This parameter is used for calculating accel/decel torque when compensating for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 1000.0

Load Torque Filter (Acc/Dec Torque)

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control ⇒ Load Inertia

This parameter is used to set the response sensitivity when calculating the accel/decel torque. This setting applies to load inertia compensation while operating in the Drooping Control mode.

This parameter should be gradually adjusted to provide smoother Drooping Control operation while operating with heavy loads.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 200.0

Drooping Reference

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Drooping Control ⇒ Drooping Reference

This parameter sets the method to be used in determining the output torque while operating in the Drooping Control mode.

Settings:

Total Torque Calculated by the Detection Current.Torque without Acc/Dec Torque Calculated by Detection Current.Total Torque Calculated by the Command Current.Torque without Acc/Dec Torque Calculated by the Command Current.



Factory Default — Total torque calculated by the detection current


Light-load High-speed Operation Selection

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation

This parameter enables the Light-Load High-Speed function by selecting an operating mode. The Light-Load High-Speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in F341.

This parameter may be disabled.

If either of the other selections are made and configured, and after the criteria of F331 – F333 are met, the Light-Load High-Speed function is enabled and this parameter determines the operating mode of the Light-Load High-Speed function.

Settings:

DisabledReservedAutomatic Enable - Automatic Speed (F341)Automatic Enable - Preset Speed (Preset IDBin is OR’ed w/1000Bin)

Discrete Enable - Automatic Speed (F341) (see item 60 of Table 8 on pg. 77)Discrete Enable - Preset Speed (Preset IDBin is OR’ed w/1000Bin) (see item

60 of Table 8 on pg. 77)





Minimum — 30.0


Units — Hz


F331 F334


Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-Limit Frequency

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-Limit Frequency

This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, once surpassed, allows the Light-load High-speed function to be used.

The Light-Load High-Speed function may be used if the frequency threshold (F331) and the following conditions are met:

1) Light-Load High-Speed Operation Enable is configured at F330.

2) The output torque is less than the setting established in F335 when reaching the frequency setting here.





Minimum — 30.0


Units — Hz

Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait-Time

After the time setting of F333 times out, this parameter determines the length of time that the Light-Load High-Speed criteria must be met until the Light-Load High-Speed function engages.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 10.0

Units — Seconds

Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Detection Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Detection Time

This parameter determines the length of time that the load requirement must meet the Light-Load High-Speed criteria before the Light-Load High-Speed Enable (F330) is recognized.

Once recognized, the timer setting of F332 must expire to engage the Light-Load High-Speed function.


Parameter Type — Yes


Changeable During Run — Numerical

Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 10.0

Units — Seconds

Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load Detection Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load Detection Time

While operating in the Light-Load High-Speed mode, this parameter determines the length of time that a load exceeding the Light-Load High-Speed operation criteria may exist before the Light-Load High-Speed mode is terminated and normal operation resumes.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 10.0

Units — Seconds


F335 F339


Switching Load Torque During Forward-Run

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Switching Load Torque During Forward Run

While running forward, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.

If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes.





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 250

Units — %

Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Acceleration

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Acceleration

During forward acceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.






Minimum — 0

Maximum — 250

Units — %

Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Deceleration

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Deceleration

During forward deceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.






Minimum — 0

Maximum — 250

Units — %

Switching Load Torque During Reverse-Run

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Switching Load Torque During Reverse Run

While running in reverse, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.






Minimum — 0

Maximum — 250

Units — %

Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration

During reverse acceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.






Minimum — 0

Maximum — 250

Units — %


F340 F355


Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration

During reverse deceleration, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (F331) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.






Minimum — 0

Maximum — 250

Units — %

Frequency for Automatic High-Speed Operation at Light-Load

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Crane/Hoist Settings ⇒ Express Speed Settings ⇒ Frequency for Automatic High-Speed Operation at Light-Load

This parameter establishes the speed that the ASD will ramp to when operating in the Light-Load High-Speed mode.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 80.00

Units — %

On-Trip Powerline Switching

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Line Power Switching

This parameter Enables/Disables the On Trip Powerline Switching feature. When enabled, the system is instructed to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to the commercial power in the event of a trip.

Settings:






At-Frequency Powerline Switching


When enabled, this parameter sets the frequency at which the At Frequency Powerline Switching function engages. The At Frequency Powerline Switching function commands the system to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to commercial power once reaching the frequency set here.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz


F356 F358


ASD-side Switching Wait Time


This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before outputting a signal to the motor once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has been met.





Minimum — 0.01

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds

Commercial Power Wait Time


This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before allowing commercial power to be applied to the motor once the switch-to-commercial-power criteria has been met.





Minimum — (ASD-dependent)

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds

Commercial Power Switching Freq. Hold Time


This parameter determines the amount of time that the connection to commercial power is maintained once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has been met.





Minimum — 0.10

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds


F360 F364


Feedback Source

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings

This parameter Enables/Disables PID feedback control. When enabled, this parameter determines the source of the motor-control feedback.

Settings:

PID Control DisabledVI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)

Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) — A closed-loop control technique that seeks error minimization by reacting to three values: One that is proportional to the error, one that is representative of the error, and one that is representative of the rate of change of the error.



Factory Default — Control Disabled


Feedback Source Delay Filter


This parameter determines the delay in the ASD output response to the motor-control feedback signal (signal source is selected at F360).





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 255

Proportional (P) Gain


This parameter determines the degree that the Proportional function affects the output signal. The larger the value entered here, the quicker the drive responds to changes in feedback.





Minimum — 0.01

Maximum — 100.0

Integral (I) Gain


This parameter determines the degree that the Integral function affects the output signal. The smaller the value here, the more pronounced the effect of the integral function on the output signal.





Minimum — 0.01

Maximum — 100.0

Upper Deviation Limits


This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may increase the output signal.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 50.00

Units — %


F365 F370


Lower Deviation Limits


This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may decrease the output signal.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 50.00

Units — %

Feedback Settings Differential (D) Gain


This parameter determines the degree that the Differential function affects the output signal. The larger the value entered here, the more pronounced the affect of the differential function for a given feedback signal level.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 2.55

Number of PG Input Pulses

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ PG Settings

This parameter is used to set the end-of-travel range when using an encoder on a motor-driven positioning system (e.g., hoist/crane, etc.).





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 9999

Units — Pulse Count

PG Input Phases


This parameter determines the type of information that is supplied by the phase encoder.

Settings:

1 — Speed2 — Speed and Direction





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 2

Units — Phase Count

PG Disconnect Detection


This parameter Enables/Disables the system’s monitoring of the PG connection status when using encoders with line driver outputs.

Note: The ASD-Multicom-J option board is required to use this feature.

Settings:

DisabledEnabled





Electronic Gear Setting


This parameter sets the number of pulses per revolution when using a shaft-mounted encoder and the PG Option Board for closed loop speed control.





Minimum — 100

Maximum — 4000


F371 F375


Position Loop Gain


This parameter provides a divisor for the pulse input when operating in the Pulse Control mode.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Position Completion Range


During a deceleration ramp, this parameter sets a speed range that must be attained before the Stop command may be executed.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 4000

Frequency Limit at Position


While operating in the Position-Control mode and using PG feedback, this setting determines the maximum acceleration rate in Hz/second.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8001

Units — Hz/Second

Current Control Proportional Gain


This parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output current to control speed. The larger the value entered here, the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback.





Minimum — 100.0

Maximum — 1000

Current Control Integral Gain


This parameter sets the degree and rate at which the output frequency will be allowed to change when prompted by changes in the output current.

The larger the value entered here, the quicker/more the drive responds to changes in feedback.





Minimum — 100.0

Maximum — 1250


F376 F380


Speed Loop Proportional Gain


This parameter sets the Proportional Gain (sensitivity) of the drive when monitoring the PG signal to control speed. The larger the value entered here, the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback and the quicker it responds.





Minimum — 3.2

Maximum — 1000

Speed Loop Integral Gain


This parameter sets the response time of the Speed Loop Integral Gain. The smaller the value here, the more pronounced (quicker) the effect of the integral function.





Minimum — 10.0

Maximum — 200.0

Motor Counter Data


This parameter sets the pulses-per-revolution displayed at the Monitor screen when using a shaft-mounted encoder for speed control. This setting is used for display purposes only and does not affect the speed control of the system.

If zero is selected here then the setting at F370 (Electronic Gear Setting) determines the pulses-per-revolution to be displayed at the Monitor screen.

Settings:

Selection 0 — F370 setting

Selection 1 — 256 pulses/revolution







Factory Default — Selection 0


Minimum — Selection 0

Maximum — Selection 5

Speed Loop Parameter Ratio


Contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department for information on this parameter.





Minimum — 0.01

Maximum — 10.00

Use Speed Mode

Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speed Mode

This parameter Enables/Disables the Use Speed mode. When enabled, the system uses all of the parameter settings of the Preset Speed being run. Otherwise, only the frequency setting is used.

Settings:







F381 F386


Preset Speed Direction #1

Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds

Determines the forward/reverse setting for the #1 Preset Speed (F018).

Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse






F387 F392





Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse






F393 F402





Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse








Settings:

ForwardReverse





Vector Motor Model Autotune Command

Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Vector Motor Model

This parameter sets the Autotune command status.

Settings:

Autotune DisabledReset Motor DefaultsEnable Autotune on Run Command



Factory Default — Autotune Disabled


Vector Motor Model Slip Frequency Gain


This parameter provides a degree of slip compensation for a given load. A higher setting here decreases the slip allowed for a given load/ASD output ratio.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 2.55

Motor Constant 1 (primary resistance)


This parameter is the measurement of the stator resistance and is considered a Motor Constant (unchanging). This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor.

To use Vector Control, Automatic Torque Boost, or Automatic Energy-saving, the Motor Constant setting (motor tuning) is required.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100,000 MΩ

Units — Ω


F403 F412


Motor Constant 2 (secondary resistance)


This parameter is the measurement of the rotor resistance and is considered a Motor Constant (unchanging). This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor.

This setting (motor tuning) is required to use the Vector Control, Automatic Torque Boost, or Automatic Energy-saving functions.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — Open

Units — Ω

Motor Constant 3 (exciting inductance)


This parameter is used to input the excitation inductance for the motor. This value is used in conjunction with other constants to tune the motor.






Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 6500.0

Units — µH

Motor Constant 4 (load inertia)


This parameter is used to control the load inertia during speed changes. Acceleration and deceleration overshoot may be reduced by increasing this value.






Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 100.0

Motor Constant 5 (leakage inductance)


This parameter provides slight increases in the output voltage of the drive at the high speed range.






Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 650.0

Number of Poles of Motor

Program ⇒ Motor Parameters ⇒ Motor Settings

This parameter identifies the number of motor poles.





Minimum — 2

Maximum — 16

Motor Capacity


This parameter identifies the wattage rating of the motor.





Minimum — 0.10

Maximum — (ASD-dependent)

Units — kW


F413 F421


Motor Type


This parameter identifies the type of motor being used.

Settings:

Toshiba EQP III TEFCToshiba EQP III ODPToshiba EPACT TEFCToshiba EPACT ODPOther Motor



Factory Default — Toshiba EQP III TEFC


Motor Constant 3 Enable


This parameter Enables/Disables tuning of Motor Constant 3 during an Autotune.

Settings:




Factory Default — Enable


Torque Command

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Control

When operating in the Torque Control mode, this parameter allows the user to select the source of the torque command signal.

Settings:

VI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)LED Keypad OptionBinary/BCD InputCommon Serial (TTL)RS232/RS485Communication Card



Factory Default — RX


Torque Command Filter


This parameter reduces the motor vibration caused by large-inertia loads. A small value will have a great effect while an increased value will have a lesser effect.





Minimum — 10.0

Maximum — 200.0


F422 F424


Synchronized Torque Bias Input


This parameter Enables/Disables the Synchronized Torque Bias input function. When enabled, this parameter identifies the source of the Synchronized Torque Bias input signal.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)LED Keypad OptionBinary/BCD InputCommon Serial (TTL)RS232/RS485Communication Card


Parameter Type — Selection list



Tension Torque Bias Input


This parameter Enables/Disables the Tension Torque Bias input function and identifies the source of the Tension Torque Bias input signal when enabled.

Settings:






Load Sharing Gain Input


This parameter Enables/Disables the Load Sharing Gain input function and is enabled by selecting a Load Sharing Gain input signal source.

Settings:







F425 F428


Forward Speed Limit Input

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Speed Limiting

This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Speed Limit Input control function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the forward speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here. If Setting is selected, the value set at F426 is used as the Forward Speed Limit input.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)Setting





Forward Speed Limit Level


This parameter provides a value to be used as the Forward Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at F425.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

Reverse Speed Limit Input


This parameter Enables/Disables the Reverse Speed Limit Input control function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the reverse speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here. If Setting is selected, the value set at F428 is used as the Reverse Speed Limit input.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)Setting





Reverse Speed Limit Level


This parameter provides a value to be used as the Reverse Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at F427.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz


F429 F433


Torque Command Mode


This parameter specifies whether the torque command function is to be used in one direction or both (F/R).

Settings:

Fixed DirectionF/R Permitted



Factory Default — Fixed Direction


Speed Limit (torque) Reference


The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This parameter sets the input terminal that will be used to control the allowable speed variance.

Settings:

NoneVI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)Fixed





Speed Limit Torque Level


The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This parameter sets the targeted speed. The plus-or-minus value (range) for this setting may be set at F432.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

Speed Limit Torque Range


The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This parameter sets a plus-or-minus value (range) for the Speed Limit Torque Level (F431).





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

Speed Limit Torque Recovery


The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This parameter sets the response time of the system to torque change requirements.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 2.50

Units — Seconds


F440 F444


Power Running Torque Limit #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings

This parameter determines the source of the control signal for the positive torque limit setting. If Setting is selected, the value set at F441 is used as the Power Running Torque Limit #1 input.

Settings:

VI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)Setting



Factory Default — Setting


Driving Torque Limit #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Manual Torque Limit Settings

This parameter provides a value for the Power Running Torque Limit #1 setting if Setting is selected at F440. This value provides the positive torque upper limit for the #1 motor.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %

Regeneration Torque Limit #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings

This parameter determines the source of the Regenerative Torque Limit control signal. If Setting is selected, the value set at F443 is used for this parameter.

Settings:

VI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)Setting



Factory Default — Setting


Regeneration Torque Limit Setting #1

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings ⇒ Manual Settings

This parameter provides a value to be used as the Regeneration Torque Limit #1 if Setting is selected at F442.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %



This parameter is used to set the positive torque upper limit for the #2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %


F445 F450




This parameter is used to set the negative torque upper limit for the #2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %








Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %








Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %








Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %








Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %

Torque Limit Mode

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings ⇒ Torque Limit Mode

Contact Toshiba’s Marketing Department for information on this parameter.

Settings:

Driving/RegenPositive/Negative



Factory Default — Driving/Regen



F451 F454


Torque Limit Mode (Speed Dependent)

Program ⇒ Torque Setting Parameters ⇒ Torque Limit Settings ⇒ Torque Limit Mode (Speed Dependent)

This parameter allows for either wide or very limited speed fluctuations while operating in the Torque Control mode.

The ASD output follows the commanded speed when No Speed Cooperation is selected and has a very limited speed fluctuation range when Standard is selected.

Settings:

StandardNo Speed Cooperation



Factory Default — Standard


Continued Stall Until Trip During Power Operation

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall ⇒ Continuing Stall Period

This parameter allows the user to extend the Overvoltage Stall (F305) and the Overcurrent Stall (F017) time settings.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 1.00

Units — Seconds

Stall Prevention During Regeneration

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Stall ⇒ Stall Prevention During Regeneration

This parameter Enables/Disables the Overvoltage Stall (F305) and the Overcurrent Stall (F017) function during regeneration only. Application-specific conditions may occur that warrant disabling the Stall function during regeneration.

Settings:

With Stall PreventionWithout Stall Prevention



Factory Default — With Stall Prevention.


Current Differential Gain

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ Current Differential Gain

This parameter determines the degree that the current differential function affects the output signal. The larger the value entered here, the more pronounced the Current Differential Gain.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 327.6


F470 F473


VI/II Bias Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ VI/II ⇒ Bias

This parameter is used to fine-tune the bias of the VI/II input terminals.


This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD system.

This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255

VI/II Gain Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ VI/II ⇒ Gain

This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the VI/II input terminals.


This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD system.

This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255

RR Bias Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RR ⇒ Bias

This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.







Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255

RR Gain Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RR ⇒ Gain

This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.







Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255


F474 F477


RX Bias Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RX ⇒ Bias

This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.







Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255

RX Gain Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RX ⇒ Gain

This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.







Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255

RX2 Bias Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RX2 ⇒ Bias

This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.


This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and either increasing or decreasing this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255

RX2 Gain Adjust

Program ⇒ Frequency Setting Parameters ⇒ Speed Reference Setpoints ⇒ RX2 ⇒ Gain

This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control or the Torque Control mode.







Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 255


F480 F485


Exciting Strengthening Coefficient

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Exciting Strengthening Coefficient

This parameter determines the rate at which the excitation current is allowed to go from zero to saturation and is enabled at F481.





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 255

Over Exciting Cooperation

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Over-Exciting Cooperation

This parameter determines the method used to control the rate that the excitation current is allowed to reach saturation. If Effective is selected, the preset Torque Control or Speed Control settings will determine the rate that the motor reaches excitation saturation.

Settings:

EffectiveApplied by F480



Factory Default — Effective


Current Vector Control

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Control Margin Modulation ⇒ % Current Vector Control

This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation when operating in the Current Vector Control mode.





Minimum — 80.0

Maximum — 300.0

Units — %

Voltage Vector Control

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Control Margin Modulation ⇒ % Voltage Vector Control

This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation while operating in the Voltage Vector Control mode.





Minimum — 80.0

Maximum — 300.0

Units — %

Constant Vector Control

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Control Margin Modulation ⇒ % Voltage Vector Control

This parameter establishes the control margin of modulation while operating in the Constant Vector Control mode.





Minimum — 80.0

Maximum — 300.0

Units — %

Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone

This parameter determines the degree that the Stall function is effective while operating the motor in the field weakening zone.





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 255


F486 F491


Excitation Starting Rate

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Excitation Starting Rate

This parameter establishes the rate of increase in the excitation current from a zero output of the ASD.





Minimum — 1.64

Maximum — 327.6

Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss

This parameter compensates for losses in the rotor-to-stator coupling of the excitation and torque current energy.





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 255

Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time

This parameter adjusts the degree of voltage compensation during dead time by increasing or decreasing the on-time of the programmed PWM just prior to the start of the dead time.





Minimum — 1.64

Maximum — 327.6

Dead Time Compensation (Enable)

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Dead Time Compensation

This parameter Enables/Disables the Dead Time Compensation function. The Dead Time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of the on-off IGBT signal that feeds the Gate Driver board during the off portion of the on-off cycle.

Settings:

EnabledDisabled





Dead-time Compensation Bias

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Dead-time Compensation Bias

This parameter sets a bias for the Dead-time Compensation function. The Dead-time Compensation feature provides a smoothing of the on-off IGBT signal that feeds the Gate Driver board.





Minimum — -32.768

Maximum — 32.767

Switching Frequency of Current/Voltage Control

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters ⇒ Switching Frequency between Current and Voltage Control

This parameter sets the threshold frequency at which ASD control is switched between Current-control and Voltage -control.





Minimum — 10.00

Maximum — 60.00

Units — Hz


F500 F501


Accel #2 Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ #1 – #4 Settings


This setting is also used to determine the acceleration rate of the Motorized Pot function.






Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds

Decel #2 Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings

This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #2 Deceleration profile. The accel/decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using F508.

This setting is also used to determine the deceleration rate of the Motorized Pot function.

Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the acceleration time.





Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds


F502 F502


Accel/Decel Pattern #1


This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the #1 Accel/Decel parameter.

Settings:

LinearS-Pattern 1S-Pattern 2

The figures below provide a profile of the available accel/decel patterns.



Factory Default — Linear


Linear acceleration and deceleration is the default pattern and is used on most applications.

S-pattern 1 is used for applications that require quick acceleration and deceleration. This setting is also popular for applications that require shock absorption at the start of acceleration or deceleration.

S-pattern 2 acceleration and deceleration decreases the rate of change above the base frequency.


F503 F507



Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ 1 – #4 Settings


Settings:






Acc/Dec Group


While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter selects the accel/decel profile to be used during a multiple-accel/decel profile configuration. The accel/decel setting for selections 1 – 4 may be found at F009, F500, F510, and F514, respectively.

Settings:

Group 1Group 2Group 3Group 4

Note: If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter.





Acc/Dec Switching Frequency #1

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Accel/Decel Special

This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel #1 profile to the Accel #2 profile during a multiple-acceleration profile configuration.





Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

S-Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment


Sets the lower limit of S-pattern 1 and 2.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 50.00

Units — %

S-Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment


Sets the upper limit frequency of S-pattern 1 and 2.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 50.00

Units — %


F508 F512


Accel/Decel Lower Limit Time


This parameter sets the lower limit of the Accel/Decel time.





Minimum — 0.01

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds

Accel #3 Time








Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds

Decel #3 Time


This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #3 Deceleration profile.

The accel/decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using F508.

Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the deceleration time.





Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds




Settings:







F513 F516


Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #2







Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

Accel #4 Time








Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds

Decel #4 Time


This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the drive to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the #4 Deceleration profile. The accel/decel pattern may be set using F502. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using F508.

Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic Accel/Decel and Stall settings may lengthen the deceleration time.





Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6000

Units — Seconds




Settings:







F517 F520


Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #3







Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

Pattern Run

Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Pattern Run

This parameter Enables/Disables the Pattern Run mode. When enabled, this feature allows up to 15 Preset Speeds to be run sequentially for a user-determined duration and number of times.

Settings:


Pattern Run Description

User-defined Preset Speeds are labeled 1 – 15 (see F018). The ID number of any one of the fifteen frequencies (1 – 15) may be entered into the Speed # field of the Pattern Run screen and run for the number of times entered into the Repeat field (see F530). The execution of grouped Preset Speeds in this manner is called a Pattern Run.

Skip may be selected to ignore a Speed # field.

Pattern Run Setup

1. Configure an unused discrete input terminal for Pattern #1 (2, 3, or 4). This terminal will initiate the selected Pattern Run. The input terminal settings may be configured via Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Input Terminals (see Table 8 on pg. 77 for available input terminal settings).

2. Enable the Pattern Run mode of operation via Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Pattern Run ⇒ Enable/Disable (check box).

3. Configure the Preset Speeds that are to be used as the Group Speed set of frequencies via Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds (e.g., Preset Speed #1 on pg. 67).

4. Configure the Group Speeds by associating the Preset Speeds that are to be enabled and grouped (from step 3) as Group Speed 1 (2, 3, or 4) via Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds. Set the Repeat field to the number of times that the selected group is to be run. Set unused speed settings to Skip.

5. From the Remote mode (Local|Remote light is off), initiate a Run command (e.g., F and/or R terminal On).

6. Connect the input terminal that was configured in step 1 to CC and the Pattern Run will start and continue as programmed. Open the connection to stop the Pattern Run before its conclusion.

See F018 on pg. 67 for further information on this parameter.






F521 F535


Pattern Run Mode Restart Command

Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Pattern Run

This parameter sets the start condition of subsequent Pattern Runs after the initial Pattern Run has been terminated or has completed its programming.

Settings:

ResetContinue





Group #1 Speed Repeat Factor

Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Speeds

This parameter sets the number of times that the pattern defined in Group #1 will be run.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — Infinite

Group #1 Speed #1 (Pattern Run)


Up to four groups of Preset Speeds may be setup and run from this screen. The Preset Speed numbers (1 – 15) may be entered into the Speed # field to be run for the number of times entered into the Repeat field (0 – 254) or forever by selecting Infinite. Running multiple Preset Speeds as a group is called a Pattern Run.

This parameter allows the user to run the Preset Speeds 1 – 15 as a group and is identified as Group #1.

Skip may be selected to ignore a Preset Speed entry.

See F520 for further information on this setting.





Group #1 Speed #2


Same as #1 Group Speed #1 (see F531).





Group #1 Speed #3







Group #1 Speed #4







Group #1 Speed #5








F536 F546


Group #1 Speed #6







Group #1 Speed #7







Group #1 Speed #8









This parameter sets the number of times that the enabled preset speeds of Group #2 will be run; 0 – 254 or Infinite.





Group #2 Speed #1







Group #2 Speed #2







Group #2 Speed #3







Group #2 Speed #4







Group #2 Speed #5







Group #2 Speed #6








F547 F557


Group #2 Speed #7







Group #2 Speed #8





Factory Default — Skip









Group #3 Speed #1







Group #3 Speed #2







Group #3 Speed #3







Group #3 Speed #4







Group #3 Speed #5







Group #3 Speed #6







Group #3 Speed #7








F558 F568


Group #3 Speed #8














Group #4 Speed #1







Group #4 Speed #2







Group #4 Speed #3







Group #4 Speed #4







Group #4 Speed #5







Group #4 Speed #6







Group #4 Speed #7







Group #4 Speed #8





Factory Default — Skip



F570 F578


Pattern #1 Characteristics (Pattern Run)

Program ⇒ Pattern Run Control Parameters ⇒ Preset Speeds ⇒ 1

In conjunction with the setting of F585, this parameter is used to set the run-time of Preset Speed 1 when used as part of a Pattern Run.

Settings:

Time From StartTime From ReachNo LimitUntil Next Step



Factory Default — Time From Start




Same as #1 Pattern Characteristics (see F570).























































F579 F586












































Pattern Run #1 Run-Time Setting


This parameter sets the run-time value for the #1 Preset Speed mode when used as part of a Pattern Run.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds

Pattern Run #2 Continuation Mode Run-Time Setting







Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds


F587 F592









Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds


F593 F598









Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds








Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds


F599 F602









Minimum — 1

Maximum — 8000

Units — Seconds




The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The name-plated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement (see F701 to change the display unit).






Minimum — 10.0

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Overcurrent Stall Level


This parameter specifies the output current level at which the output frequency is reduced in an attempt to prevent a trip. The overcurrent level is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive.

Note: Parameter F017 (Soft Stall) must be enabled to use this feature.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 200.0

Units — %

Trip Save at Power Down Enable

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Trip Settings

This parameter Enables/Disables the Trip Save at Power Down setting. When enabled, this feature logs the trip event and retains the trip information when the system powers down. The trip information may be viewed from the Monitor screen.

When disabled, the trip information will be cleared when the system powers down.

Settings:







F603 F606


Emergency Off Mode Settings

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Emergency Off Settings

This parameter determines the method used to stop the motor in the event that an Emergency Off command is received and the system is configured to use this feature.

This setting may also be associated with the FL terminals to allow the FL relay to change states when an EOFF condition occurs by setting the FL terminal to Fault FL (all) (see F132).

Note: A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD. Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone.

Settings:

Coast StopDeceleration StopDC Injection Braking Stop



Factory Default — Coast Stop


Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Emergency Off Settings

When DC Injection is used as a function of receiving an Emergency Off command (F603), this parameter determines the time that the DC Injection braking is applied to the motor.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds

Output Phase Loss Detection

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Phase Loss

This parameter Enables/Disables the monitoring of each phase of the 3-phase output signal (U, V, or W) of the ASD. If either line is missing, inactive, or not of the specified level, the ASD incurs a trip.

Settings:






OL Reduction Starting Frequency


This parameter is used to reduce the start frequency during very low-speed motor operation. During very low-speed operation the cooling efficiency of the motor decreases. Lowering the start frequency aides in minimizing the generated heat.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 30.00

Units — Hz


F607 F612


Motor 150% OL Time Limit


This parameter establishes a time that the motor may operate at 150% of its rated current before tripping. This setting applies the time/150% reference to the individual settings of each motor (e.g., this setting references 150% of the F600 setting for the #1 motor).

The unit will trip sooner than the time entered here if the overload is greater than 150%.





Minimum — 10

Maximum — 2400

Units — Seconds

Inrush Current Suppression

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Soft Start

The startup inrush current may be suppressed for up to 2.5 seconds. This parameter determines the length of the inrush current suppression.





Minimum — 0.30

Maximum — 2.50

Units — Seconds

Interlock with ST

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Soft Start

This parameter Enables/Disables the ST-to-CC connection dependency on the successful completion of a Soft Start. If enabled, the ST-to-CC connection will happen only after a successful Soft Start.





Low Current Trip

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Low Current Settings

This parameter Enables/Disables the low-current trip feature.

When enabled, the drive will trip on a low-current fault if the output current of the drive falls below the level defined at F611 and remains there for the time set at F612.

Settings:






Low Current Trip Threshold


When the low-current monitor is enabled, this function sets the low-current trip threshold. The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Low Current Trip Threshold Time


When the low-current monitor is enabled, this function sets the time that the low-current condition must exist to cause a trip.





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 255

Units — Seconds


F613 F617


Short Circuit Test

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Arm Short Check Settings

This parameter determines when the system will perform an Output Short Circuit test.

Settings:

Every RunEvery Powerup



Factory Default — Every Run


Short Circuit Test Duration

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Arm Short Check Settings

This parameter sets the pulse width of the ASD output pulse that is applied to the motor during an Output Short Circuit test.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 100

Units — µS

Overtorque Trip

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Overtorque Parameters

This parameter Enables/Disables the Over Torque Tripping function.

When enabled, the ASD trips if an output torque value greater than the setting of F616 or F617 exists for a time longer than the setting of F618.

When disabled, the ASD does not trip due to overtorque conditions.

Settings:






Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Positive Torque)


This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping. This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %

Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Negative Torque)


This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping during regeneration. This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %


F618 F624


Overtorque Detection Time


This parameter sets the amount of time that the overtorque condition may exceed the tripping threshold level set at F616 and F617 before a trip occurs.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — Seconds

Cooling Fan Control

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Cooling Fan Settings

This parameter sets the cooling fan run-time command.

Settings:

AutomaticAlways On



Factory Default — Automatic


Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Cumulative Run Timer

This parameter sets a run-time value that, once exceeded, closes a contact. The output signal may be used to control external equipment or used to engage a brake.

Note: The time displayed is 1/10th of the actual time (0.1 hr. = 1.0 hr.).





Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 999.9

Units — Hours (X 100)

Abnormal Speed Detection Filter Time

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Abnormal Speed Settings

This parameter sets the time that an overspeed condition must exist to cause a trip.





Minimum — 0.01

Maximum — 100.0

Units — Seconds

Overspeed Detection Frequency Range


This parameter sets the upper level of the Base Frequency range that, once exceeded, will cause an Overspeed Detected alert.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 30.0

Units — Hz

Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range


This parameter sets the lower level of the Base Frequency range that, once exceeded, will cause a Speed Drop Detected alert.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 30.00

Units — Hz


F625 F629


Overvoltage Stall Level (fast)


This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded, will cause an Overvoltage Stall. An Overvoltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Overvoltage Trip.

If the overvoltage condition persists for over 250 µS, an Overvoltage Trip will be incurred.

Note: This feature may increase deceleration times.





Minimum — 50.00

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %

Overvoltage Stall Level


This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded, will cause an Overvoltage Stall. An Overvoltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Overvoltage Trip.

If the overvoltage condition persists for over 4 mS, an Overvoltage Trip will be incurred.

Note: This feature may increase deceleration times.





Minimum — 50.0

Maximum — 250.0

Units — %

Undervoltage Trip


This parameter Enables/Disables the Undervoltage Trip function.

With this parameter Enabled, the ASD will trip if the undervoltage condition persists for a time greater than the F628 setting.

A user-selected contact may be actuated if so configured.

If Disabled the ASD will stop and not trip; the FL contact is not active.

Settings:






Undervoltage Detection Time


This parameter sets the time that the undervoltage condition must exist to cause an Undervoltage trip when this function is enabled at F627.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds

Undervoltage Stall level


This parameter sets the low end of the DC bus voltage threshold that, once it drops below this setting, will activate the setting of F302 (Ridethrough Mode). Activation may be the result of a momentary power loss or an excessive load on the bus voltage. Once activated, the system will attempt to maintain the bus voltage level set here until the motor stops.

Note: This feature may decrease deceleration times.





Minimum — 50.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %


F630 F641


Brake Trouble Internal Timer

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Brake Fault Timer

This parameter is used in conjunction with the discrete input terminal setting 64 [System Consistent Sequence (BA: braking answer)] (see item 64 of Table 8 on pg. 77 for further information on this feature).

After activating the discrete input terminal System Consistent Sequence (B: braking release), the setting of this parameter defines a window of time in which 1) a Braking Answer response must be received or 2) the brake must release.

Should this timer setting expire before the Braking Answer is returned or the brake releases, a Brake Fault is incurred. Otherwise, the brake releases and normal motor operations resume.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 10.00

Units — Seconds

Position Difference Limit

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Feedback Settings ⇒ Position Difference Limit

While operating in the Position Control mode, this parameter sets the maximum allowed difference between the commanded position and resulting position as indicated by encoder pulses.





Minimum — 0.1

Maximum — 6553

Release After Run Timer

Program ⇒ Protection Parameters ⇒ Brake Fault Timer

This parameter sets the time that the brake will hold after the Run command criteria has been met.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 2.50

Units — Seconds

Earth Fault Alarm Level

Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Alarm Level

This parameter sets the threshold level (%) that must be exceeded to meet the Earth Fault Alarm activation criteria.





Minimum — 0

Maximum — 100

Units — %

Earth Fault Alarm Time

Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Alarm Time

In the event that the Earth Fault Alarm activation criteria is met, a timer begins to count down to zero. Upon reaching zero, the Earth Fault Alarm is activated.

This parameter sets the start-time of the count-down timer.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 2.50

Units — Seconds


F642 F652


Earth Fault Trip Level

Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Trip Level

This parameter sets the threshold level (%) that must be exceeded to meet the Earth Fault Trip activation criteria.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100

Units — %

Earth Fault Trip Time

Program ⇒ Protection ⇒ Earth Fault Trip Time

In the event that the Earth Fault Trip activation criteria is met, a timer begins to count down to zero. Upon reaching zero, the Earth Fault Trip is activated.

This parameter sets the start-time of the count-down timer.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 2.50

Units — Seconds

Acc/Dec Base Frequency Adjustment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ Analog Input Functions

This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Base Frequency. When enabled, either VI/II or RR may be used as an input source for the modification of the Base Frequency setting.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRR





Upper Limit Frequency Adjustment


This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Upper Limit. When enabled, either VI/II or RR may be used as an input source for the modification of the Upper Limit setting.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRR





Acceleration Time Adjustment


This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Acceleration Time. Selecting either VI/II or RR enables this feature. The selected input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Acceleration Time setting. The multiplication factor may be from 1 to 10.

Note: An acceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRR






F653 F660


Deceleration Time Adjustment


This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Deceleration Time. Selecting either VI/II or RR enables this feature. The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Deceleration Time setting.

Note: A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRR





Torque Boost Adjustment


This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Torque Boost setting. Selecting either VI/II or RR enables this feature. The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Torque Boost setting.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRR





Frequency Override Additive Input

Program ⇒ Feedback Parameters ⇒ Override Control

This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency.

Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Output Frequency.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)LED Keypad (option)Binary/BCD InputCommon Serial (TTL)RS232/RS485Communication CardMotorized PotPulse Input 1






F661 F672


Frequency Override Multiplying Input


This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency.

Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected input is used as a multiplier of the programmed Output Frequency.

If operating using the LED Keypad Option and Setting is selected, the value entered at F729 is used as the multiplier.

Settings:

DisabledVI/IIRRRXRX2 (option)Setting (LED Keypad Option Only)





AM Terminal Assignment

Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ AM

This setting determines the output function of the AM analog output terminal. This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 62.

Note: To read voltage at this terminal a 100 – 500Ω resistor is required and must be connected from AM (+) to AM (-). The voltage is read across the 100 – 500Ω resistor. Current may be read by connecting an ammeter from AM (+) to AM (-).

The AM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1/1024. The AM Terminal Adjustment (F671) must be used to calibrate the output signal for a proper response. SW-1 may be switched to allow for the full-range output to be either 0 – 1 mA or 4 – 20 mA when providing an output current, or either 0 – 1 or 1 to 7.5 volts when providing an output voltage at this terminal.



Factory Default — Output Current


AM Terminal Adjustment

Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ AM

This function is used to calibrate the AM analog output terminal.

To calibrate the AM analog output, connect a meter (current or voltage) as described at F670. With the drive running at a known frequency, adjust this parameter (F671) until the running frequency produces the desired DC level output at the AM terminal.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 1280

Analog 1 Terminal Setting

Program ⇒ Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters ⇒ Analog 1

This parameter sets the Analog 1 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of 33 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only.

Possible assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 7 on pg. 62.



Factory Default — Output Voltage



F673 F701


Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment


This parameter adjusts the coefficient of the Analog 1 circuit to obtain an output that corresponds with a known input.

This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices (DVM, counters, etc.).





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 1280

Analog 2 Terminal Setting


This parameter sets the Analog 2 multifunction programmable terminal to 1 of 33 possible functions and is available on the ASD Multicom option board only.




Factory Default — Post-compensation Frequency


Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment


This parameter adjusts the coefficient of the circuit to obtain an output that corresponds with a known input.

This function is used in the calibration of external signal measuring devices (DVM, counters, etc.).





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 1280

FP Terminal Setting

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ FP

This parameter commands the multifunction programmable FP terminal to monitor the value of 1 of 33 possible system functions. As the monitored function changes in magnitude or frequency, the pulse count of the FP output pulse train changes in direct proportion to changes in the monitored function. As the monitored value goes up so does the pulse count of the FP output.

Note: The duty cycle of the output pulse train remains at 65 ±5.0 µS.




Factory Default — Output Frequency


FP Terminal Adjustment

Program ⇒ Terminal Selection Parameters ⇒ FP

This parameter sets the full-scale reading of the FP Terminal. The full-scale reading of the monitored variable selected in F676 may be set here.





Minimum — 1.000

Maximum — 43.200

Units — kHz

Display Units for Voltage and Current

Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Display Units

This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI.

Settings:

%V/A



Factory Default — %



F702 F720


Hz Per User-defined Unit


This parameter allows the user to input a quantity to be displayed on the EOI that is proportional to the output frequency of the drive.

This feature is useful when the output of a process is moved along at a rate that is proportional to the output frequency of the drive.





Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 200.0

Units — Hz/UDU

Frequency Display Resolution


The parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed during non-Accel/Decel functions.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 0.01

Accel/Decel Special Display Resolution


This parameter sets the number of decimal places to be displayed for Accel/Decel functions.





Minimum — 1

Maximum — 0.01

Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initialization

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Special Parameters⇒ Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During Typeform Initialization

This parameter Enables/Disables the ability to initialize user parameters during a Type Form initialization.

Settings:

AllowedProhibited



Factory Default — Allowed


V/f Group


While operating using the LED Keypad Option 1 of 4 V/f groups may be selected and run. Each V/f group is comprised of 4 user-defined variables: Base Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, Manual Torque Boost, and Electronic Thermal Protection. Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in this section (Direct Access Parameter Information).

Settings:

Group 1Group 2Group 3Group 4







F721 F729


Stop Pattern


While operating using the LED Keypad Option the Stop Pattern parameter determines the method used to stop the motor when the stop command is issued via a Stop command from the LED Keypad.

The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system that is setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system that is setup at F250, F251, and F252.

The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load.

Settings:

Decel StopCoast Stop

Note: The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603. If using the LCD EOI, press ESC from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter.



Factory Default — Decel Stop


Torque Limit Group


While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor. The settings of profiles 1 – 4 may be setup at F441, F444, F446, and F448, respectively.

Settings:

1234






Feedback in Panel Mode


While operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter Enables/Disables PID feedback control.

Settings:

EnabledDisabled






LED Option Override Multiplication Gain


If operating using the LED Keypad Option this parameter provides a value to be used in the event that Setting is selected for the Frequency Override Multiplying Input (F661).





Minimum — -100.00

Maximum — 100.00


F731 F735


LOD Control and Stopping Method

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function ⇒ LOD

Enables/Disables the Low Output Disable function and, if enabled, selects a stopping method.

Settings:

DisabledEnabled — Decel StopEnabled — Coast Stop





LOD Start Level (Hz)

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function ⇒ LOD Start Level (Hz)

The Low Output Disable Start Level sets the output frequency threshold that, if exceeded, will initiate the LOD function if properly configured.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — Max. Freq.

Units — Hz

LOD Start Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function ⇒ LOD Start Time

The Low Output Disable Start Time sets the amount of time that the LOD Start Level criteria must be met and maintained for the LOD function to be initiated.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 3600.0

Units — Seconds

LOD Setpoint Boost (Hz)

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function ⇒ LOD Setpoint Boost (Hz)

The Low Output Disable feature adds the user-input frequency value to the commanded frequency.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

LOD Boost Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function ⇒ LOD Boost Time

The Low Output Disable Boost Time sets the on-time timer for the LOD Boost function.

Once expired, the LOD Boost function ceases.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 3600.0

Units — Seconds


F736 F801


LOD Feedback Level (Hz)

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function ⇒ LOD Feedback Level (Hz)

The Low Output Disable Feedback Level sets a frequency level that, until the output of the ASD drops below this setting, the Restart Delay Timer does not start.





Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

LOD Restart Delay Time

Program ⇒ Special Control Parameters ⇒ Low Output Disable Function ⇒ LOD Restart Delay Time

The Low Output Disable Restart Delay Time sets the time that, once expired and all standard ASD requirements are met, normal ASD operation resumes.





Minimum — 0.0

Maximum — 3600.0

Units — Seconds

Communication Baud Rate (logic)

Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication Settings

This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Baud Rate of the communications link.

The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.

Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (Off then On) for the changes to take effect.





Minimum — 1200

Maximum — 9600

Units — BPS

Parity


This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Parity setting of the communications link.



Settings:

No ParityEven ParityOdd Parity



Factory Default — Even Parity



F802 F805


ASD Number


This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by assigning an identification (ID) number to each ASD in the communications network.







Minimum — 0

Maximum — 255

RS232/RS485 Communications Time Out Time


This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by setting the time that no activity may exist over the communications link before the link is severed (Time Out).







Minimum — 0

Maximum — 100

Units — Seconds

RS232/RS485 Communications Time-Out Action


This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by determining the action to be taken in the event of a time-out (Time-Out Action).

The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the drive.


Settings:

No ActionAlarmTrip



Factory Default — Trip


Communication Interval


This parameter sets the Common Serial response delay time.






Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 2.00

Units — Seconds


F806 F810


TTL Master Output


In a master/follower configuration, this setting determines the output parameter of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs.

Note: Select No Follower if F826 is configured as a Master Output controller. Otherwise, an EOI failure will result.


Settings:

No Follower (normal operation)Frequency ReferenceOutput Command FrequencyTorque CommandOutput Torque Command



Factory Default — No Follower (normal operation)


Frequency Point Selection

Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication Reference Adjust

This parameter enables the communications reference for scaling by selecting an input type.

See F811 — F814 for further information on this setting.

Note: Scaling the communications signal is not required for all applications.


Settings:

DisabledCommon Serial (TTL)RS232/RS485Communication Card






F811 F813


Communications Speed Reference #1


When enabled at F810, this parameter is used to allow the user to set the gain and bias of the speed control input to the drive when the speed control signal is received via the source selected at F810.

Communications Input Speed Control Setup

Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive control input via Communications:

• Set Communications Speed Reference #1 (F811) — the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency #1.

• Set Communications Speed Frequency #1 (F812).

• Set Communications Speed Reference #2 (F813) — the input signal that represents BIN Speed Frequency #2.

• Set Communications Speed Frequency #2 (F814).


Once set, as the input signal value changes, the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings.

This parameter sets the Communications Speed Reference #1 input value that represents Communications Speed Frequency #1. This value is entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Speed Reference #1 input value range.






Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %

Communications Speed Frequency #1


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Reference speed control input.


This parameter sets Communications Speed Frequency #1 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of Communications Speed Reference #1.






Minimum — 0.00


Units — Hz

Communications Speed Reference #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Speed Reference #2 speed control input.


This parameter sets the Communications Speed Reference #2 input value that represents Communications Speed Frequency #2. This value is entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Speed Reference #2 input value range.






Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 100.0

Units — %


F814 F825


Communications Speed Frequency #2


This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Speed Reference #2 speed control input.


This parameter sets Communications Speed Frequency #2 and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of Communications Speed Reference #2.






Minimum — 0.0


Units — Hz

RS232/RS485 Baud Rate


This parameter sets the RS232/RS485 baud rate.


Settings:

12002400480096001920038400





RS232/RS485 Wire Count


This parameter sets the communications protocol to the 2 or 4 wire method.


Settings:

2 wire4 wire





RS232/RS485 Response Delay Time


This parameter sets the RS232/RS485 response delay time.






Minimum — 0.00

Maximum — 2.00

Units — Seconds


F826 F830


RS232/RS485 Master Output


In a master/follower configuration, this setting determines the output parameter of the master ASD that will be used to control the applicable follower ASDs.

Note: Select No Follower if F806 is configured as a Master Output controller. Otherwise, an EOI failure will result.


Settings:

No Follower (normal operation)Frequency ReferenceOutput Command FrequencyTorque CommandOutput Torque Command



Factory Default — No Follower (normal operation)


Communication Error

Program ⇒ Communication Setting Parameters ⇒ Communication Error

In the event of a communication error during a transmission, the command that was transmitted may be cleared or held.


Settings:

Command Request ClearedCommand Request Held



Factory Default — Command Request Cleared




Alarms, Trips, and Troubleshooting

Alarms and TripsThis section lists the available user-notification codes of the EOI display and provides information that assists the user in the event that a Fault is incurred. The User Notification codes are displayed as an indication that a system function or system condition is active (i.e., ATN, DB, and DBON). The code is displayed on the EOI for the duration of the activation.

If a user setting or an ASD parameter has been exceeded, or if a data transfer function produces an unexpected result, a condition that is referred to as a Fault is incurred.

An Alarm is an indication that a Fault is imminent if existing operating conditions continue unchanged. An Alarm may be associated with an output terminal to notify the operator of the condition remotely, close a contact, or engage a brake. At the least, an Alarm will cause an alarm code to appear on the EOI display. Table 10 lists the 16 possible Alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the H7 ASD.

In the event that the condition that caused the Alarm does not return to its normal operating level within a specified time, the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred (Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably). A Trip is a safety feature, and is the result of a Fault, that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning, or one or more of the variables listed below exceeds its normal range (time and/or magnitude).

• Current,

• Voltage,

• Speed,

• Temperature,

• Torque, or

• Load.

See Table 12 on pg. 184 for a listing of the potential Trips and the associated probable causes.

The operating conditions at the time of the trip may be used to help determine the cause of the trip. Listed below are operating conditions that may be used to assist the operator in correcting the problem or that the ASD operator should be prepared to discuss when contacting Toshiba’s Customer Support for assistance.

• What trip information is displayed?

• Is this a new installation?

• Has the system ever worked properly and what are the recent modifications (if any)?

• What is the ASD/Motor size?

• What is the CPU version and revision level?

• What is the EOI version?

• Does the ASD trip when accelerating, running, decelerating, or when not running?

• Does the ASD reach the commanded frequency?

• Does the ASD trip without the motor attached?

• Does ASD trip with an unloaded motor?



AlarmsTable 10 lists the alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the H7 ASD. Each alarm code listed is accompanied by a description and a possible cause. In the event that the source of the malfunction cannot be determined, contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for further information on the condition and for an appropriate course of action.

The Alarms are listed in the top-down order that they are checked for activation. Only the first to be detected will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen.

Table 10. H7 Alarms.

EOI Display Function Description Possible Causes

CM1 Comm1 Error Internal communications error. • Improperly programmed ASD.

• Improper communications settings.

• Improperly connected cables.CM2 Comm2 Error External communications error.

EMG Emergency Off Output signal from the ASD is terminated and a brake may be applied if so configured.

• Stop|Reset pressed twice at the EOI.

• EOFF command received remotely.

• ASD reset required.

MOFF Main Undervoltage

Undervoltage condition at the 3-phase AC input to the ASD.

• Low 3-phase utility voltage.

OC Over Current ASD output current greater than F601 setting.

• Defective IGBT (U, V, or W).

• ASD output to the motor is connected incorrectly. Disconnect the motor and retry.

• ASD output phase-to-phase short.

• The ASD is starting into a spinning motor.

• Motor/machine jammed.

• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is starting or while running.

• Accel/Decel time is too short.

• Voltage Boost setting is too high.

• Load fluctuations.

• ASD operating at an elevated temperature.

*OH Overheat ASD ambient temperature excessive.

• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.

• ASD is too close to heat-generating equipment.

• Cooling fan vent is obstructed (see Mounting the ASD on pg. 18).

• Cooling fan is inoperative.

• Internal thermistor is disconnected.

OJ Timer Run-time counter exceeded. • Type Reset required; select Clear run timer.

* Reset ignored if active.



*OLI ASD Overload Load requirement in excess of the capability of the ASD.

• The carrier frequency is too high.

• An excessive load.

• Acceleration time is too short.

• DC damping rate is set too high.

• The motor is starting into a spinning load after a momentary power failure.

• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.

OLM Motor Overload Load requirement in excess of the capability of the motor.

• V/f parameter improperly set.

• Motor is locked.

• Continuous operation at low speed.

• The load is in excess of what the motor can deliver.

*OLR Resistor Overload

Excessive current at the Dynamic Braking Resistor.

• Deceleration time is too short.

• DBR configuration improperly set.

*OP Overvoltage DC bus voltage exceeds specifications.

• ASD attempting to start into a spinning motor after a momentary power loss.

• Incoming utility power is above the specified range.

• Decel time is too short.

• Voltage spikes at the 3-phase input; install inductive filter.

• DBR required.

• DBR resistance value is too high.

• DBR function is turned off.

• Overvoltage Stall feature is turned off.

• System is regenerating.

• Load instability.

• Disable the Ridethrough function (F302).

OT Overtorque Torque requirement in excess of the setting of F616 or F617 for a time longer than the setting of F618.

• ASD is not correctly matched to the application.

• F616 or F617 setting is too low.

• Obstructed load.

*POFF Control Undervoltage

Undervoltage condition at the 5, 15, or the 24 VDC supply.

• Defective Control board.

• Excessive load on power supply.

• Low input voltage.

PtSt Reference Point Two speed-reference frequency setpoint values are too close to each other.

• Two speed reference frequency setpoints are too close to each other (increase the difference).

UC Undercurrent Output current of the ASD is below the level defined at F611 and remains there for the time set at F612.

* Reset ignored if active.

EOI Display Function Description Possible Causes



User Notification CodesThe User Notification codes appear in the top right corner of the Frequency Command screen while the associated function is active.

User Notification codes notify the user of active functions that are usually only momentary under normal conditions and are active for the duration of activation only. User notification events are not error conditions and only convey active system functions to the user.

Table 11. User Notification codes.

Trips/FaultsA Trip is an ASD response to a Fault (though, Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably). A Trip is a safety feature that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning.

Listed in Table 12 are the possible Faults that may cause a Trip and the possible causes. When a Trip is incurred the system displays the Fault screen. The Fault screen identifies the active Fault.

Table 12

EOI Function Description

Atn Autotune activeAtn indicates that the Autotune function is active. If the initial Autotune fails for any reason, an automatic retry is initiated if Other is selected at F413.Atn2 indicates that an Autotune retry is active for the duration of the automatic retry.

dbOn DC BrakingThis code conveys the DC Injection function being carried out. The display shows db when braking and shows dbOn when the motor shaft stationary function is being carried out.

Fault Screen Display Possible Causes

ASD Overload • Acceleration time is too short.

• DC Injection current is too high.

• V/f setting needs to be adjusted.

• Motor running during restart.

• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.

Autotune Error • Autotune readings that are significantly inconsistent with the configuration information.

• A non-3-phase motor is being used.

• Incorrect settings at F400, F413, or F414.

• Using a motor that has a significantly smaller rating than the ASD.

• ASD output cabling is too small, too long, or is being housed in a cable tray with other cables that are producing an interfering EMF.

• Motor is running during the Autotune function.

Communication Error • Communication malfunction.

• Improper or loose connection.

• Improper system settings.

Control Power Undervoltage • This fault is caused by an undervoltage condition at the 5, 15, or the 24 VDC supply.

• 3-phase input voltage low.



CPU Fault • CPU malfunction.

DC Bus Undervoltage • 3-phase input voltage low.

• Defective control board.

• Excessive load on the power supply.

• Undervoltage/Ridethrough settings require adjustment.

DC Fuse Open • Internal DC bus fuse is open.

Dynamic Braking Resistor Overcurrent • ASD inability to discharge the bus voltage during regeneration.

• No dynamic braking resistor (DBR) installed.


• Improper DBR setup information.

• Defective IGBT7 (or IGBT7 ckt.).

• 3-phase input voltage is above specification.

Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload • Deceleration time is too short.

• DBR setting adjustment required.

• Overvoltage Stall setting adjustment required.

Earth Fault • Ground fault at the motor.

• Ground fault at the output of the ASD.

• Current leakage to Earth Ground.

EEPROM Data Fault • EEPROM read malfunction.

EEPROM Fault • EEPROM write malfunction.

Emergency Off • Emergency Off command received via EOI or remotely.

Encoder Loss • Encoder signal missing while running during closed-loop operation.

Flash Memory Fault • Flash memory malfunction.

Gate Array Fault • Defective Gate Array or Gate Array malfunction.

Input Phase Loss • 3-phase input to the ASD is low or missing.

Load Drooping • Load requirement is in excess of the capabilities of the motor.

Load End Short Circuit • Improper wiring at the ASD output to the motor.

Low Current • Improper Low Current detection level setting.

Main Board EEPROM Fault • Internal EEPROM malfunction.

Motor Overload • V/f setting needs to be adjusted.

• Motor is locked.

• Continuous operation at low speed.

• Load requirement exceeds ability of the motor.

• Startup frequency setting adjustment required.

No Fault • No active faults.

Note: The event that caused the Trip(s) must be corrected or must decrease to less than the threshold value required to cause the trip to allow for a Reset to be recognized. In the event of multiple active trips, the trip displayed will remain until all faults are corrected and all trips are cleared.




Option Fault • Optional device malfunction.

• Improper system settings (at ASD or optional device).

• Loose or improper connection.

Output Current Protection Fault • Output current is not within specified limits.

• Loose or improper ASD-to-motor connection.

Output Phase Loss • 3-phase output from the ASD is low or missing.

Overcurrent During Acceleration • V/f setting needs to be adjusted.

• Restart from a momentary power outage.

• The ASD is starting into a rotating motor.

• ASD/Motor not properly matched.

• Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).

• Accel time too short.

• Voltage Boost setting is too high.


• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.

• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during acceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, this fault occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during acceleration.

Overcurrent During Deceleration • Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).



• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.

• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during deceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during deceleration.

Overcurrent During Run • Load fluctuations.

• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.

• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during a fixed-speed run or if during a fixed-speed run the ASD overheats. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA on a fixed-speed run.

Overheat • Cooling fan inoperative.

• Ventilation openings are obstructed.

• Internal thermistor is disconnected.

Over Speed • Result of a motor speed that is greater than the commanded speed when using an encoder for speed control.

• Improper encoder connection or setup information.

• Defective encoder.





Overtorque • A torque requirement by the load in excess of the setting of F616 or F617 for a time longer than the setting of F618.

• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.

• The load is obstructed.

Overvoltage During Acceleration • Motor running during restart.

Overvoltage During Deceleration • Deceleration time is too short.

• DBR value is too high.

• DBR required (DBR setup required).

• Stall protection is disabled.

• 3-phase input voltage is out of specification.

• Input reactance required.

Overvoltage During Run • Load fluctuations.

• 3-Phase input voltage out of specification.

PG Type/Connection Error • ASD is configured to receive a signal from a shaft-mounted encoder and no signal is being received while running.

• Disconnection at the Encoder circuit.

• Motor is stopped and is generating torque via torque limit control.

• ASD is not configured properly.

Phantom Fault • In a multiple ASD configuration a faulted ASD signals the remaining ASDs that a fault has occurred and shuts down the non-faulted ASDs.

Position Deviation Error • Operating in the Position Control mode and the resulting position exceeds the limits of the F631 setting.

RAM Fault • Internal RAM malfunction.

ROM Fault • Internal ROM malfunction.

Sink/Source Setting Error • Improperly positioned Sink/Source jumper on the control board or on an option device.

• Sink/Source configuration of an option device is incorrect.

Torque Proving Fault • Lift-First Pulse Count (F743) adjustment required.

Typeform Error • Firmware information (typeform) loaded into the Gate Driver board is inconsistent with the device in which the firmware is being used.

• The Gate Driver board has been replaced.

• The Gate Driver board is defective.

U Phase Short Circuit • Low impedance at the U lead of the ASD output.

V Phase Short Circuit • Low impedance at the V lead of the ASD output.

W Phase Short Circuit • Low impedance at the W lead of the ASD output.





Viewing Trip InformationIn the event that the condition causing an Alarm does not return to the normal operating level within a specified time, the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred.

When a trip occurs, the resultant error information may be viewed either from the Trip History screen (Program ⇒ Monitor Setup ⇒ Trip History), the Trip Monitor from ASD screen (Program ⇒ Monitor Setup ⇒ Trip Monitor From ASD), or from the Monitor screen.

Trip HistoryThe Trip History screen records the system parameters for up to 101 trips (RTC option required). The recorded trips are numbered from zero to 100. Once the Trip History record reaches trip number 100, the oldest recorded trip will be deleted with each new record stored (first-in first-out). The Trip # field may be selected and scrolled through to view the recorded trip information for a given trip number. The monitored parameters are listed in Table 13 as At-trip Recorded Parameters (parameter readings at the time that the trip occurred).

Table 13. Trip History Record Parameters (RTC option required).

At-trip Recorded Parameters

Trip records that are assigned zero and one are comprised of the full list of monitored parameters (32). Trip records 2 – 18 are comprised of parameters 1 – 16. Trip records 19 – 100 are comprised of parameters 1 – 7.

1) Trip Number 9) Bus Voltage 17) Torque Reference 25) ASD Load

2) Trip Type 10) Discrete Input Status 18) Torque Current 26) DBR Load

3) Time and Date 11) OUT1/OUT2/FL Status 19) Excitation Current 27) Input Power

4) Frequency at Trip 12) Timer 20) PID Value 28) Output Power

5) Output Current 13) Post Compensation Frequency 21) Motor Overload 29) Peak Current

6) Output Voltage 14) Feedback (inst.) 22) ASD Overload 30) Peak Voltage

7) Direction 15) Feedback (1 sec.) 23) DBR Overload 31) PG Speed

8) Frequency Reference 16) Torque 24) Motor Load 32) PG Position



Trip Monitor From ASDThe Trip Monitor From ASD function records the trip name of up to four trips and catalogs each trip as Most Recent, Second Most Recent, Third Most Recent, and Fourth Most Recent. Once reset (Clear Trip), the trip records are erased. If no trips have occurred since the last reset, No Fault is displayed for each trip record.

Note: An improper ASD setup may cause some trips — reset the ASD to the Factory Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction (Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Type Reset ⇒ Restore Factory Defaults).

Trip Record at Monitor ScreenThe at-trip condition of the last incurred trip may be viewed at the Monitor screen (see pg. 46). The Monitor screen at-trip record is erased when the ASD is reset and may be viewed without the use of the RTC option.

Clearing a TripOnce the cause of the trip has been corrected, performing a Reset re-enables the ASD for normal operation.

The record of a trip may also be cleared using either of the following methods:

• Cycling power (trip info may be saved via F602 if desired),

• Pressing the Stop|Reset key twice,

• Remotely via the communications channel,

• Momentarily connecting terminal RES to CC of the Control Terminal Strip, or

• Via Program ⇒ Utility Parameters ⇒ Type Reset ⇒ Clear Trip (clears Trip Monitor From ASD).



Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information

H7 ASD Part Numbering Convention.

Note: The Type 1 enclosed versions of these drives meet or exceed the specification UL 1995, the Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment, and complies with the applicable requirements for installation in a compartment handling conditioned air. The equipment listed in this manual meets or exceeds the criteria for CE certification and carries the CE label.

Note: For CE compliance, all Toshiba ASD enclosures with hinged doors shall have a lock placed on the standard door fastener or be fitted with the Toshiba lock kit (P/N 53730).

Note: All Toshiba ASD enclosures carry an IP20 rating.

Enclosure Dimensions/WeightTable 14.

Model Number

VT130H7UFig.

A(in/mm)

B(in/mm)

C (in/mm)

D(in/mm)

E(in/mm)

F(in/mm)

G(in/mm)

H(in/

mm)

Conduit Plate/Box Number (see pg.

195 and 196)Shipping Weight (lbs.)

Bottom Top

2035B

23

8.47/215 7.28/185 7.33/186 8.47/215 7.95/202 6.74/171 0.53/13 0.23/6 49462

N/A

122055B

2080B

2110B

14.22/361

12.16/309 11.23/285 14.22/361 13.05/331 11.46/291 0.55/14 0.28/7

49033

48

2160B 50

2220B 52

2270B15.72/399 49032

53

2330B 54

2400B

2426.47/672

17.5/445 12.81/325 22.33/567 23.75/603 14.25/362 0.75/19 0.38/1049932 157

2500B

2600B 27.53/699 57319-GRY 167



2750B24 38.63/981 17.5/445 13.78/350 36.35/923 37.75/959 12.63/321 0.75/19 0.63/16 49900 49468

261

210KB 264

212KB25 50.00/1270 24.15/613 20.00/508 46.15/1172 48.50/1232 12.00/305 0.75/19 0.69/18 54086 54086

463

215KB 472

4055B

23

8.47/215 7.28/185 7.33/186 8.47/215 7.95/202 6.74/171 0.53/13 0.23/6 49462 N/A13

4080B

4110B 15

4160B

14.22/361 12.16/309 11.23/285 14.22/361 13.05/331 11.46/291 0.55/14 0.28/7 49033 N/A

504220B

4270B 52

4330B 53

4400B 54

4500B 58

4600B

24

24.63/625

17.5/445 12.81/325 22.33/567 23.75/603 14.25/362 0.75/19 0.38/10

50097

N/A

121

4750B 147

410KB 26.47/672 49932 157

412KB 27.53/699 57319-GRY 167

415KB38.63/981 17.5/445 13.78/350 36.35/923 37.75/959 12.63/321 0.75/19 0.63/16 49900 49468

261

420KB 265

425KB

2550.00/1270 24.15/613 20.00/508 46.15/1172 48.50/1232 12.00/305 0.75/19 0.69/18 54086 54086

463

430KB 472

435KB 493

440KB 73.00/1854 24.00/610 20.00/508 68.00/1727 71.00/1803 16.00/406 0.75/19 0.69/18 51342 51342 665

6035B

23

8.47/215 7.28/185 7.33/186 8.47/215 7.95/202 6.74/171 0.53/13 0.23/6 49462 N/A 13

6060B

6080B

6120B

6160B

6220B

14.22/361 12.16/309 11.23/285 14.22/361 13.05/331 11.46/291 0.55/14 0.28/7 49033 N/A

50

6270B 52

6330B 54

6400B 56

6500B 58

Table 14. (Continued)

Model Number

VT130H7UFig.

A(in/mm)

B(in/mm)

C (in/mm)

D(in/mm)

E(in/mm)

F(in/mm)

G(in/mm)

H(in/

mm)



Bottom Top



Figure 23.

6600B

24

24.63/625 17.5/445 12.81/325 22.33/567 23.75/603 14.25/362 0.75/19 0.38/10 50097 N/A155

6750B

610KB 162

612KB38.63/981 17.5/445 13.78/350 36.35/923 37.75/959 12.63/321 0.75/19 0.63/16 49900 49468

261

615KB 265

620KB

25 50.00/1270 24.15/613 20.00/508 46.15/1172 48.50/1232 12.00/305 0.75/19 0.69/18 54086 54086

466625KB

630KB 475

635KB 490

Table 14. (Continued)

Model Number

VT130H7UFig.

A(in/mm)

B(in/mm)

C (in/mm)

D(in/mm)

E(in/mm)

F(in/mm)

G(in/mm)

H(in/

mm)



Bottom Top



Figure 24.



Figure 25.



Conduit Plate InformationThe conduit plate information provided below is for the 0.75 to 350 HP H7 ASDs of the 230, 460, and 600 volt product lines. Each bottom or top conduit plate may be cross referenced to the applicable device using the information in Table 14 on page 190.

Note: Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions are in inches.

Figure 26.



Figure 27.



Conduit Extender Box (option)The Conduit Extender Box (P/N ASD-Conduit-1) may be used when more room is required at the ASD conduit connection point. This option makes adding and removing conduit easier and quicker.

Installation

1. Remove the conduit plate 49462 (see Figure 28).2. Install the Conduit Extender Box 53354 (see Figure 29) — secure the box using the 2 screws from

the conduit plate.3. Make the conduit and wiring connections.4. Install the Conduit Extender Box cover 53355 (see Figure 29).

Figure 28

Figure 29. Conduit Extender Box.

CoverP/N 53355

Conduit BoxP/N 53354



H7 ASD Adapter Mounting PlatesThe optional H7 ASD mounting plates may be used when replacing a G3 ASD with the H7 ASD. The mounting plates are fitted with permanently attached nuts for securing the H7 ASD to the adapter plate. The perimeter mounting-hole dimensions of the adapter plate allow the adapter plate to be mounted using the existing cabinet (or wall) holes.

Listed below are the device types that require an adapter plate and their associated adapter plate. The adapter plate dimensions are shown on pg. 199 – 201.

Note: Units not listed do not require an adapter plate.

H7 ASD ModelAdapter Plate

Number H7 ASD ModelAdapter Plate

Number

2035

51761

208051762

2055 4110

4055 2270

51764

4080 2330

2110

51763

4330

2160 4400

2220 4500

4160 6160

4220 4600 51769

4270 6120 51770

6060 — —



ASD Adapter Mounting Plate DimensionsFigure 30. 51761 and 51762 adapter mounting plate dimensions.



Figure 31. 51763 and 51764 adapter mounting plate dimensions.



Figure 32. 51769 and 51770 adapter mounting plate dimensions.



EOI Remote MountingThe H7 ASD may be controlled from a remote position via the EOI. For safety and application-specific reasons, some ASD installations will warrant that the operator not be in the vicinity during operation or that the EOI not be attached to the ASD housing. The EOI may be mounted either with or without the optional H7 ASD Remote Mounting Kit (P/N ASD-MTG-KIT). The ease of installation is enhanced by the H7 ASD Remote Mounting Kit which allows for easier cable routing and EOI placement.

The EOI may be mounted up to 15 feet away from the ASD and will provide the full range of functions that are available if the EOI were ASD-mounted.

Remote mounting will also allow for multiple EOI mountings at one location or one EOI may be switched between multiple ASDs. Controlling and monitoring several ASDs via an EOI may be accomplished from a central location.

The optional dust cover (P/N ASD-BPC) may be used to cover the front panel opening of the ASD housing after removing the EOI. An EOI extender cable is required for remote mounting. EOI extender cables are available in lengths of 7, 10, or 15 feet and may be ordered through your sales representative.

Remote EOI Required HardwareEOI Mounting Hardware

• 6-32 x 5/16” Pan Head Screw — P/N 50595 (4 ea.)

• #6 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01884 (4 ea.)

• #6 Flat Washer — P/N 01885 (4 ea.)

Bezel Plate Mounting Hardware

• Bezel Plate — P/N 52291

• 10-32 Hex Nut — P/N 01922 (4 ea.)

• #10 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01923 (4 ea.)

• #10 Flat Washer — P/N 01924 (4 ea.)

• Dust Cover — P/N ASD-BPC (Optional)

Extender Cables

• ASD-CAB7F: ASD, OPN, H7, EOI, Cable, RJ45, 7 ft.

• ASD-CAB10F: ASD, OPN, H7, EOI, Cable, RJ45, 10 ft.

• ASD-CAB15F: ASD, SPN, H7, EOI, Cable, RJ45, 15 ft.

EOI Installation PrecautionsInstall the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the four mounting holes of the EOI. The ambient temperature rating for the EOI is 14 to 104° F (-10 to 40° C).

• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible by the user.

• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, metal particles, or high levels of electrical noise (EMI) are present.

• Do not install the EOI where it may be exposed to flammable chemicals or gasses, water, solvents, or other fluids.

• Turn the power on only after securing the front cover to the ASD.



EOI Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT

Note: See Figure 33 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 5.

1. At the EOI mounting location, identify and mark the location of the 3.80” by 3.29” hole and the 7/32” screw holes.

2. Cut the 3.80” by 3.29” rectangular hole.

3. Drill the four 7/32” screw holes.

4. Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the mounting location using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan head screws, the #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.

5. Connect the RJ-45 extension cable(s).

EOI Dimensions (mounting)

Figure 33. EOI Mounting Dimensions.

EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT

Note: See Figures 34 and 35 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 6.

1. At the EOI mounting location, identify and mark the locations of the 5.00” by 4.60” hole and the four 11/32” screw holes.

2. Cut the 5.00” by 4.60” rectangular hole.

3. Drill the four 11/32” holes.

4. Attach and secure the Bezel plate to the front side of the mounting location using the four 10-32 hex nuts, #10 split lock washers, and the #10 flat washers.

5. Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the Bezel plate using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan head screws, #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.

6. Connect the RJ-45 extension cable(s).



EOI ASD-MTG-KIT Dimensions (mounting)

Figure 34. EOI Bezel Plate Mounting Dimensions.

Figure 35. Screw Length Precaution.

Front View Side View Back View

4.605.38

4.25

5.00

Bezel Plate Bezel Plate

Mounting Hole11/32" Screw Hole (4)

CAUTION: Failure to use the correct hardware may result in damage to the outer surface of the EOI panel and/or improper seating of the panel to the bezel plate. Use caution when mounting the EOI assembly to ensure that the internal thread clearance is maintained.

Correct Incorrect



Current/Voltage SpecificationsTable 15. 230 Volt NEMA Type-1 Chassis standard ratings table.

ModelVT130H7U

RatedKVA

Motor HP/Kw

Input Voltage3-Ph 50/60

± 2 Hz

Output Voltage3-Ph Variable

Frequency

Output Current 100%

Continuous

OverloadCurrent 120% for

60 Secs.

2035B 3.5 3.0/2.2

200 – 240 VAC (±10%)

Input Voltage Level (Max.)

10.0 A 12.0 A

2055B 5.5 5.0/3.7 16.0 A 19.2 A

2080B 8.0 7.5/5.6 23.0 A 27.6 A

2110B 11.0 10/7.5 30.0 A 36.0 A

2160B 16.0 15/11.2 45.0 A 54.0 A

2220B 22.0 20/14.9 60.0 A 72.0 A

2270B 27.0 25/18.6 71.0 A 85.2 A

2330B 33.0 30/22.4 85.0 A 102.0 A

2400B 40.0 40/30.0 114.0 A 136.8 A

2500B 50.0 50/37.0 130.0 A 156.0 A

2600B 60.0 60/44.4 156.0 A 187.2 A

2750B 75.0 75/55.5 192.0 A 230.4 A

210KB 100 100/74 248.0 A 297.6 A

212KB 125 125/92.5 312.0 A 374.4 A

215KB 150 150/111 370.0 A 444.0 A



Table 16. 460 Volt NEMA Type-1 Chassis standard ratings table.

ModelVT130H7U

RatedKVA

MotorHP/Kw


± 2 Hz


Frequency

Output Current 100%

Continuous


60 Secs.

4055B 5.5 5.0/3.7

380 – 480 VAC(±10%)


7.6 A 9.1 A

4080B 8.0 7.5/5.6 11.0 A 13.2 A

4110B 11.0 10.0/7.5 14.0 A 16.8 A

4160B 16.0 15.0/11.2 21.0 A 25.2 A

4220B 22.0 20.0/14.9 27.0 A 32.4 A

4270B 27.0 25.0/18.6 34.0 A 40.8 A

4330B 33.0 30.0/22.4 42.0 A 50.4 A

4400B 40.0 40.0/30.0 52.0 A 62.4 A

4500B 50.0 50.0/37.0 65.0 A 78.0 A

4600B 60.0 60.0/45.0 77.0 A 92.4 A

4750B 75.0 75.0/55.0 96.0 A 115.2 A

410KB 100 100/75.0 124.0 A 148.8 A

412KB 125 125/90.0 156.0 A 187.2 A

415KB 150 150/110 190.0 A 228.0 A

420KB 200 200/150 240.0 A 288.0 A

425KB 250 250/185 302.0 A 362.4 A

430KB 300 300/220 370.0 A 444.0 A

435KB 350 350/280 450.0 A 540.0 A

440KB 400 400/296 480.0 A 576.0 A



Table 17. 600 Volt NEMA Type-1 Chassis standard ratings table.

ModelVT130H7U

RatedKVA

MotorHP/Kw


± 2 Hz


Frequency

Output Current 100%

Continuous


60 Secs.

6035B 3.5 3.0/2.2

495 – 600 VAC(+5/-10%)


4.0 A 4.8 A

6060B 6.0 5.0/3.7 6.1 A 7.3 A

6080B 8.0 7.5/5.6 9.0 A 10.8 A

6120B 12.0 10.0/7.5 12.0 A 14.4 A

6160B 16.0 15.0/11.2 17.0 A 20.4 A

6220B 22.0 20.0/14.9

495 – 600 VAC(±10%)

22.0 A 26.4 A

6270B 27.0 25.0/18.6 27.0 A 32.4 A

6330B 33.0 30.0/22.4 32.0 A 38.4 A

6400B 40.0 40.0/30.0 41.0 A 49.2 A

6500B 50.0 50.0/37.0 52.0 A 62.4 A

6600B 60.0 60.0/45.0 62.0 A 74.4 A

6750B 75.0 75.0/55.0 77.0 A 92.4 A

610KB 100 100/75.0 99.0 A 118.8 A

612KB 125 125/90.0 125.0 A 150.0 A

615KB 150 150/110 150.0 A 180.0 A

620KB 200 200/150 200.0 A 240.0 A

625KB 250 250/185 250.0 A 300.0 A

630KB 300 300/220 300.0 A 360.0 A

635KB 350 350/259 336.0 A 403.2 A


V r


Cable/Terminal Specifications

Note: Input and Output power wires require shielding for CE compliance.

Note: (*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.

Installation should conform to the 2002 National Electrical Code Article 110 (NEC) (Requirements for Electrical Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.

Note: The following ratings are guidelines and shall not be the sole determining factor of the lug or wire size used with the ASD. Application-specific applicables, wire insulation type, conductor material, and local and regional regulations are but a few of the considerations when selecting the actual lug and wire type to be used with the ASD.

For further installation information see the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 18.

Table 18. 230-volt H7 ASD Cable/Terminal Specifications.

ModelT130H7U

MCP

Typical Wire/Cable Size (AWG or kcmil) Lug Size Range

Input/Output Power AM, FM, and II Terminals

Control TerminalsWire-Size/Lug-Capacity fo

Input/Output Power Recommended Maximum

2035B 20 14 10

20(3-core shield)

18(2-core shield)

24 to 82055B 30 12 10

2080B 50 10 10

2110B 50 8 4

18 to 42160B 75 6 4

2220B 100 4 4

2270B 125 3 216 to 1

2330B 150 2 2

2400B 175 1/0 1/0 10 to 1/0

2500B 200 2/0 2/012 to 4/0

2600B 250 3/0 4/0

2750B 300 *1/0 4/0*(6 to 250)

210KB 400 *3/0 4/0

212KB 500 *250 500*(1/0 to 500)

215KB 600 *350 500


V r


Note: Input and Output power wires require shielding for CE compliance.


Note: (**) Indicates that a 1.5” conduit orifice is required if using the recommended cable size.


ModelT130H7U

MCP





4055B 15 14 10

20(3-core shield)

18(2-core shield)

24 to 84080B 15 14 10

4110B 30 12 10

4160B 30 10 4

18 to 4

4220B 50 8 4

4270B 75 8 4

4330B 75 6 4

4400B 100 6 4

4500B 100 4 4

4600B 125 3 2 16 to 1

4750B 175 1 **2 10 to 1/0

410KB 200 2/0 2/012 to 4/0

412KB 250 3/0 4/0

415KB 300 *1/0 *4/0*(6 to 250)

420KB 350 *3/0 *4/0

425KB 400 *250 *500

*(1/0 to 500)430KB 600 *350 *500

435KB 700 *500 *500

440KB 700 *500 *500


V r


Note: Input and Output power wire requires shielding for CE compliance.


Note: (**) Indicates that a 1.5” conduit orifice is required if using the recommended cable size.


ModelT130H7U

MCP





6035B 15 14 10

20(3-core shield)

18(2-core shield)

24 to 8

6060B 15 14 10

6080B 15 14 10

6120B 30 14 10

6160B 30 10 10

6220B 50 10 4

18 to 4

6270B 50 8 4

6330B 50 8 4

6400B 75 6 4

6500B 100 6 4

6600B 100 4 2

16 to 16750B 125 3 2

610KB 175 1 **2

612KB 200 2/0 *4/0*(6 to 250)

615KB 225 3/0 *4/0

620KB 300 *2/0 *500

*(1/0 to 500)625KB 400 *3/0 *500

630KB 400 *250 *500

635KB 500 *300 *500



Link Reactor InformationSelection of a link reactor (DCL) is often application specific. This document will provide guidelines for selecting link reactors for the H7 ASD series of ASDs.

The 410K and the 600-Volt series of ASDs above 60 HP allow for the reactor to be mounted within the enclosure of the ASD. All other H7 ASDs require that the DCL be mounted externally.

When selecting and mounting an external DCL, the air flow around the reactor, the thermal capability of the reactor, the allowable voltage loss, and the amount of harmonic reduction required will be considerations.

Table 21. DCL Selection Table.

Model Number

VT130H7U

DCL Part Number

DCL Inductance

(mH)

DCL(Amps)

Model Number

VT130H7U

DCL Part Number

DCL Inductance

(mH)

DCL(Amps)

2035B Contact Toshiba for DCL selection assistance. 412KB

Contact Toshiba for DCL selection assistance.

2055B 415KB

2080B 36350 0.40 30.0 420KB

2110B 36351 0.30 38.0 425KB

2160B 36376 0.20 57.0 430KB

2220B 36353 0.20 76.0 435KB

2270B 36355 0.10 114 440KB

2330B

Contact Toshiba for DCL selection assistance.

6035B

2400B 6060B 36356 2.50 11.0

2500B 6080B 36356 2.50 11.0

2600B 6120B 36359 0.90 29.0

2750B 6160B 36359 0.90 29.0

210KB 6220B 36360 0.70 39.0

212KB 6270B 36362 0.50 55.0

215KB 6330B 36361 0.50 50.0

4055B 6400B 36363 0.40 75.0

4080B 6500B 36363 0.40 75.0

4110B 36358 1.30 20.0 6600B 36364 0.30 88.0

4160B 36359 0.90 29.0 6750B 36365 0.20 114.0

4220B 36360 0.70 39.0 610KB 36366 0.20 141.0

4270B 36361 0.50 50.0 612KB 36367 0.15 175.0

4330B 36363 0.40 75.0 615KB 41443 0.19 260.0

4400B 36364 0.30 88.0 620KB 41443 0.19 260.0

4500B 36365 0.20 114.0 625KB 45259 0.10 360.0

4600B 36365 0.20 114.0 630KBContact Toshiba for DCL selection assistance.

4750B 36366 0.20 141.0 635KB

410KB 42769 0.14 205.0



H7 ASD Optional DevicesThe ASD may be equipped with several options which are used to expand the functionality of the ASD. Table 22 lists the available options and their functions.

Table 22. H7 ASD Optional devices and functions.

Item Device Function

ASD7-SIM2 Emulates the input control signals of the H7 ASD via switches and pots.

ASD-BPC Provides dust protection for the H7 ASD when the EOI is removed or mounted remotely.

ASD-CAB-PC Female 9-pin d-type to RJ-45 (PC to ASD cable).

ASD-EOI-N4 A replacement NEMA-4 EOI (without Rotary Encoder)

ASD-ISO-1Provides isolation of the Control Board output circuit from the AM/FM output and from the II input.

ASD-MTG-KITEOI Remote Mounting Kit. See the section titled EOI Remote Mounting on pg. 202 for further information on this option.

ASD-RTC The Real Time Clock provides the user with a time stamp of the Start, Run, and Fault events.

ASD-SS

This option board is used to provide a hardware-based speed search function.

Note: The ASD-SS is a factory-authorized service center-installed option for all 1 – 5 HP ASDs, 10 – 25 HP 230 volt ASDs, and 15 – 40 HP 460 volt ASDs (see F314).

ASD-TB1-AC1 Provides 120 VAC discrete terminal activation and additional I/O terminals.

Conduit Extender Box (option)

Provides more working space for conduit installation than the standard conduit plate.

HS35 EncoderProvides rotational speed and/or directional information. The Encoder is mounted on the motor shaft or the shaft-driven equipment.

ASD – Multicom Option Board

Note: Multicom boards are identified as ASD-Multicom-A, -B, -F, etc.

-AIncorporates the Modbus, Profibus, or Device Net communications protocol for system control and is able to receive and process Vector Control feedback.

-B Provides a line driver and open collector interface for system control.

-FThe Tosline-F10 interface provides high-speed communication to Toshiba control equipment via twisted pair wiring.

-J Able to receive and process vector control feedback via line driver or open collector interface.

-SThe Tosline-S20 interface provides high-speed communication to Toshiba control equipment via fiber optics.

-X Provides extended terminal I/O functions for monitoring, feedback, and control.

Note: See the user manual of the applicable option for further information on each item.



H7 ASD Spare Parts Listing

Table 24. 230 Volt 3.0 – 40 HP PCB Spare Parts Listing.

Table 23. 230 Volt 3.0 – 40 HP Spare Parts Listing.

MODEL NUMBER

DC BUS FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR TRANSISTORS RECT. MAIN CAPS MOV LCD

DISPLAY

VT130H7U FU2 MS1 FAN1 FAN2 R21(A) IGM RECT. CAP MOV EOI

2035B 0064649648A

50037N/A

N/A Reside on the main circuit PCB.

49012

2055B 00647

2080B 50248 49648G 51088

2110B 00638

4567846023

N/A

00388

55624 4505645593

(2)

49054

2160B 00640 55625

45009

30536(2)

2220B

0064100388

(2)

47963 34835(2)

2270B

2330B 45813 47342

2400B 00642 42338 44362 47964(3)

52095 48019(2)

51501

Parenthesized are the total quantities per model number. Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity (2 minimum).

MODEL NUMBER

PCB Part Numbers

48048 56223 48605 56220 56000 51389

VT130H7U A, B, C, etc. PCB Typeform

2035B D B

2055B E B

2080B A B

2110B A A B

2160B A B B

2220B B C B

2270B B C C

2330B B D C

2400B C A

The following items are common to the above-listed typeforms.

Control Terminal Strip PCB — 48570A.

4-20 mA PCB — 50611A.

Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed.




MODEL NUMBER

INPUT FUSE

CONTROL FUSE

DC BUS FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR XSISTORS RECT. MAIN

CAPS MOV LCD DISPLAY

VT130H7U R, S, and T FU1 (A) FU2(A) MS1 MS2 FAN1 FAN2/3 R21 (A) (B) (C) IGM RECT. CAP MOV1 MOV (2)(3) EOI

4055B

N/A

N/A

00621 49648C

N/A

50037N/A

N/A Reside on the Main Circuit PCB.

49012

4080B50830 49648D

4110B 51088

4160B02424

45678 46023

N/A

00388

47965 4523730560

(2)

49047 N/A

4220B

4270B

00629 47966 45238

34835(27)

4330B

00388(2)

48019(2)

4400B

03250 47967 45239

45182(2)

4500B50855

(2)

4600B

37160(2)

00625 42338

44362 35489

47968(3)

46465 30536(6)

4750B

00626

4233745241

(3)

30560(6)

410KB 4233847969

(3)34835

(6)

412KB 00628 4276747970

(3)45241

(6)30122(10)

3096503672

(2)

415KB46112

(3)44272

42768 48718 3202830634

(2)50000

(3)45242

(6)

48019(8)

420KB43855

(3)43855

(2)48020

(8)425KB 39659

(3)

39660(2)

37578(2)

51973

54140 0022635489

(2)50000

(6)430KB 37576

(3)

51958 37698

45241(12)

37568(6)

435KB

37578(3)

5538300224/00226

45242(12)

37568(8)

52754

440KB 37693 00226 37580 37565(18)

PC40300P042(3)

3670





MODEL NUMBER

PCB Part Numbers

38383 44292 44293 48605 48776 50001 5138952266(Assy)

53300 56000 56220 56221 56222 56223


4055B D K

4080B D B

4110B D C

4160B E D C

4220B E E C

4270B F E D

4330B G E D

4400B H E D

4500B J E D

4600B B A(3)

(Assy) E G

4750B B (Assy) E C

410KB B (Assy) E C

412KB B (Assy) E E

415KB B (Assy) A(3)

E E

420KB B (Assy)A(3) E F

425KB B (Assy) B(3)

E G

430KB B (Assy)B(3) E G

435KB B (Assy) B(3)

E G

440KBA(6)

A(3)

A(3) B H E G

The following PCBs are common to the above-listed typeforms.


4-20 mA PCB — 50611A.

Parenthesized are the total quantities per unit. Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed. If the total quantity per unit is 3 or more then the suggested spare parts inventory is one third of the total unit quantity (2 minimum).




MODEL NUMBER

INPUT FUSE

CONTROL FUSE

DC BUS FUSE CONTACTOR FAN RESISTOR XSISTORS RECT. MAIN

CAPS MOV LCD DISPLAY

VT130H7U R, S, and T FU1 (A) FU2 (A) MS1 MS2 FAN1 FAN2 R21 (A) (B) (C) IGM RECT. CAP MOV1 MOV(2)(3) EOI

6035B

N/A

N/A

4911049648F

N/A

50037

N/A

N/AReside on the Main Circuit PCB.

49012

6060B

6080B

510886120B49648G

6160B 49660 51264 00388

6220B

56353

32143

46023

N/A

00388(2)

55626

45237

47973(2)

4905533030

(2)

6270B

6330B

32143(2)

56344 48023(2)

6400B 56352

54969 45238

49114(6)

6500B 5635149115

(6)

6600B

37164(2)

45479 42337

44362

35489

47968(3)

46465

47974(6)

6750B

56191

610KB 47969(3)

48023(6)

612KB100620

(3) 4552042768

(2) 32028 3063449999

(3)45242

(6)

48019(9)

32911

55524(2)

615KB48020

(9)

620KB39714

(3)50518

(2)

51973

54140

0022635489

(2)49999

(6)

45241(6)

45182(9)

32910(2)

625KB

37698630KB39659

(3)51958

45242(6)

50855(9)

635KB37578

(3)37578

(2) 0022437568

(9)





MODEL NUMBER

PCB Part Numbers

42180 48776 51580 52266 53300 53388 53390 55455 56000 56220 56221 56222


6035B B N

6060B B P

6080B B D

6120B B E

6160B B F

6220B Q C A B J

6270B Q C A C J

6330B R C A C J

6400B U C A C J

6500B V C A C J

6600B C 52266 C M

6750B C 52266 A(3)

C K

610KB C 52266A(3) C K

612KB A B 52266 A(3)

A(3)

C K

615KB A B 52266A(3)

A(3) C K

620KB A B 52266 B(3)

A(6)

C L

625KB A B 52266B

(3)A(6) C L

630KB A B 52266 B(3)

A(6)

C L

635KB A B 52266B

(3)A(6) C L

The following PCBs are common to the above-listed typeforms.


4-20 mA PCB — 50611A.

Toshiba recommends a spare parts inventory of 2 minimum for the parts listed.


Index


Numerics0 Hz Command Function, 1120 Hz Dead Band Signal, 11012-pulse operation, 22

AAbnormal Speed Detection Filter Time, 165Abnormal Speed Settings, 53Acc/Dec Base Frequency Adjustment, 168Acc/Dec Group, 149Acc/Dec Switching Frequency #1, 149Accel #1 Time, 64Accel #2 Time, 147Accel #3 Time, 150Accel #4 Time, 151Accel/Decel #1 – #4 Settings, 58Accel/Decel #1 Settings, 48Accel/Decel Lower Limit Time, 150Accel/Decel Pattern #1, 148Accel/Decel Pattern #2, 149Accel/Decel Pattern #3, 150Accel/Decel Pattern #4, 151Accel/Decel Settings, 58Accel/Decel Special, 58Accel/Decel Special Display Resolution, 172Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #2, 151Accel/Decel Switching Frequency #3, 152Acceleration, 64Acceleration Time Adjustment, 168Adjust Accel/Decel Automatically, 37Alarm Popups, 48Alarms, 182AM, 23, 25, 57AM Terminal Adjustment, 170AM Terminal Assignment, 170AM, FM, FP, and Analog 1&2 settings, 62Analog, 171Analog 1 Terminal Adjustment, 171Analog 1 Terminal Setting, 170Analog 2 Terminal Adjustment, 171Analog 2 Terminal Setting, 171Analog Filter, 51Analog Input Filter, 96Analog Input Functions, 50Analog1, 57Analog2, 57ASD – Multicom Option Boards, 212ASD Control, 27

ASD Number, 176ASD Overload, 184ASD7-SIM2, 212ASD-BPC, 212ASD-CAB-PC, 212ASD-EOI-N4, 212ASD-FUSEKIT-12P, 22ASD-ISO-1, 212ASD-MTG-KIT, 212ASD-NANOCOM, 27ASD-side Switching Wait Time, 127ASD-SS, 212ASD-TB1-AC1, 212At-Frequency Powerline Switching, 126Atn, 184At-trip Recorded Parameters, 188Automatic Accel/Decel #1, 60Autotune Error, 184Autotuning, 14

BBacklash Setup, 58Base Frequency Volts, 53Bezel Mounting Dimensions, 204Bezel Mounting Hardware, 202Bias and Gain, 93, 97, 100, 103BIN Input Control Setup, 106BIN Speed Control Setup, 106BIN Speed Frequency #1, 107BIN Speed Frequency #2, 107BIN Speed Reference #1, 106BIN Speed Reference #2, 107BIN Torque Control Setup, 106BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #1, 107BIN Torque Reference Setpoint #2, 108Brake Fault Internal Timer, 167Brake Fault Timer, 53Break/Make Start, 117

CCable/Terminal Specifications, 208Carrier Frequency, 58, 117CC, 23, 25CE compliance, 190CE Compliance Requirements, 11Changed from Default, 48Changed From Default screen, 35



Circuit breaker configuration, 19Clearing a Trip, 189CM1, 182CM2, 182CN3 Pinout, 28CN7 Pinout, 29CNU1/1A and CNU2/2A Pinout, 28CNU2/2A Pinout, 28Command Control Selections, 42Command Mode Selection, 60Command Source, 38Commercial Power Switching Frequency

Hold Time, 127Commercial Power Wait Time, 127Common Serial (TTL), 27Communication Baud Rate (logic), 175Communication Error, 56, 180, 184Communication Internal, 176Communication Reference Adjust, 56Communication Setting Parameters, 55Communication Settings, 55Communications Speed Frequency #1, 178Communications Speed Frequency #2, 179Communications Speed Reference #1, 178Communications Speed Reference #2, 178Compensation Coefficient for Iron Loss, 146concerns about this publication, 3Conduit Extender Box, 197Conduit Plate Information, 190, 195Configuration and Menu Options, 44Connecting the ASD, 20Connection Diagram, 31Constant Vector Control, 145Continued Stall Until Trip During Power Operation, 142continuous splash screen, 28Contrast (adjustment), 48Control, 27Control Board, 27Control Power Undervoltage, 184Control Terminal Strip, 23CPU Fault, 185Crane/Hoist Load, 58Cumulative Run Timer, 53Cumulative Run Timer Alarm Setting, 165Current Control Integral Gain, 130Current Control Proportional Gain, 130Current Differential Gain, 142Current Vector Control, 145Current/Voltage Specifications, 205Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Frequency, 90Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #1 Voltage, 90Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Frequency, 90Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #2 Voltage, 90Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #3 Frequency, 91

Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #3 Voltage, 91Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #4 Frequency, 91Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #4 Voltage, 91Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #5 Frequency, 91Custom V/f Five-Point Setting #5 Voltage, 91

DDate and time setting, 48dbOn, 184DC Braking, 52DC Bus Undervoltage, 185DC Fuse Open, 185DC Injection Braking Current, 111DC Injection Braking Start Frequency, 111DC Injection Braking Time, 111DCL Selection Table, 211Dead Time Compensation, 59Dead Time Compensation (Enable), 146Dead-time Compensation Bias, 146Decel #1 Time, 64Decel #2 Time, 147Decel #3 Time, 150Decel #4 Time, 151Deceleration Time Adjustment, 169Default Setting Changes, 35Default Term. Setting, 23Derate Threshold frequency, 117Direct Access, 48Direct Access Parameter Information, 60Direct Access Parameters/Numbers, 60Direction (of motor rotation), 63Discrete Input, 23Discrete Input Terminal Assignment, 77Discrete Output, 23Display Units, 49Display Units for Voltage and Current, 171Disposal, 4Down Key, 32Drive Characteristics, 17Driving Torque Limit #1, 140Driving Torque Limit #2, 140Driving Torque Limit #3, 141Driving Torque Limit #4, 141Drooping, 122Drooping Control, 55Drooping Gain, 122Drooping Insensitive Torque Range, 122Drooping Output Filter, 122Drooping Reference, 123Dynamic Braking, 52, 119Dynamic Braking Enable, 119Dynamic Braking Resistor Overcurrent, 185Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload, 185



EEarth Fault, 185Earth Fault Alarm Level, 167Earth Fault Alarm Time, 167Earth Fault Trip Level, 168Earth Fault Trip Time, 168EEPROM Data Fault, 185EEPROM Fault, 185Electronic Gear Setting, 129Electronic Operator Interface, 32Electronic Thermal Protection #1, 161Electronic Thermal Protection #2, 87Electronic Thermal Protection #3, 88Electronic Thermal Protection #4, 89Emergency Off, 185Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time, 162Emergency Off Mode Settings, 162Emergency Off Setting, 52EMG, 182Enclosure Dimensions, 190Enclosure Dimensions/Weight, 190Encoder, 212Encoder Action, 48Encoder Loss, 185End Frequency, 110Enter Key, 32EOI Bezel Mounting Dimensions, 204EOI Bezel Plate Dimensions (mounting), 204EOI Features, 32EOI Installation Precautions, 202EOI Operation, 33EOI Remote Mounting, 202EOI Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT, 203EOI Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT, 203EOI Setup Options, 48Equipment Inspection, 3Escape Key, 32Excitation Starting Rate, 146Exciting Strengthening Coefficient, 145Extended Terminal Function, 71Extender Cables, 202

FF, 23, 24F Input Terminal Assignment, 72F Input Terminal Delay, 81Fan Control, 53, 165Fault, 181Fault Status, 47Faults, 181Feedback in Panel Mode, 173

Feedback Parameters, 54, 55Feedback Settings, 54Feedback Settings Differential (D) Gain, 129Feedback Source, 128Feedback Source Delay Filter, 128Ferraz Shawmut Semiconductor fuse, 22FH, 64Filter Selection Table, 13FL Off Delay, 85FL On Delay, 84FL Output Terminal Assignment, 80FLA, 23, 25FLA, B, and C switching relationship, 25Flash Memory Fault, 185FLB, 23, 25FLC, 23, 25FM, 23, 25, 57FM Terminal Adjustment, 61FM Terminal Assignment, 61Forward Speed Limit Input, 138Forward Speed Limit Level, 138FP, 23, 25FP Terminal Adjustment, 171FP Terminal Setting, 171FP Terminal Settings, 50Frequency Command screen, 34Frequency Control, 58Frequency Control Selections, 43Frequency Display Resolution, 172Frequency for Automatic High-Speed Operation

at Light-Load, 126Frequency Limit at Position, 130Frequency Mode #1, 61Frequency Mode #2, 48, 95Frequency Override Additive Input, 169Frequency Override Multiplying Input, 170Frequency Point Selection, 177Frequency Reference Source, 38Frequency Set Mode, 44Frequency Setting, 48Frequency Setting Parameters, 51Fundamental Parameters, 48Fwd/Rev Disable, 52

GGate Array Fault, 185General Safety Information, 1Group #1 Speed #1, 153Group #1 Speed #2, 153Group #1 Speed #3, 153Group #1 Speed #4, 153Group #1 Speed #5, 153



Group #1 Speed #6, 154Group #1 Speed #7, 154Group #1 Speed #8, 154Group #1 Speed Repeat Factor, 153Group #2 Speed #1, 154Group #2 Speed #2, 154Group #2 Speed #3, 154Group #2 Speed #4, 154Group #2 Speed #5, 154Group #2 Speed #6, 154Group #2 Speed #7, 155Group #2 Speed #8, 155Group #2 Speed Repeat Factor, 154Group #3 Speed #1, 155Group #3 Speed #2, 155Group #3 Speed #3, 155Group #3 Speed #4, 155Group #3 Speed #5, 155Group #3 Speed #6, 155Group #3 Speed #7, 155Group #3 Speed #8, 156Group #3 Speed Repeat Factor, 155Group #4 Speed #1, 156Group #4 Speed #2, 156Group #4 Speed #3, 156Group #4 Speed #4, 156Group #4 Speed #5, 156Group #4 Speed #6, 156Group #4 Speed #7, 156Group #4 Speed #8, 156Group #4 Speed Repeat Factor, 156

HH7 Adapter Mounting Plates, 198H7 ASD Control, 27H7 Part Numbering Convention, 190Handling and Storage, 4Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Acceleration, 125Heavy-Load Torque During Forward Deceleration, 125Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Acceleration, 125Heavy-Load Torque During Reverse Deceleration, 126Hz Per User-defined Unit, 172

II/O and Control, 23I/O Circuit Configurations, 30ICCDESIGNS, 27II, 23, 25Important Notice, 2Initial Setup, 34

Input Phase Loss, 185Input Special Functions, 50Input Terminal 12 Assignment, 75Input Terminal 13 Assignment, 75Input Terminal 14 Assignment, 76Input Terminal 15 Assignment, 76Input Terminal 16 Assignment, 76Input Terminal Assignment, 50Input Terminal Delays, 51Input Terminal Priority, 71Inrush Current Suppression, 163Installation and Connections, 18Installation Notes, 18Installation Precautions, 5Integral (I) Gain, 128Interlock with ST, 163Introduction, 2

JJog Run Frequency, 113Jog Settings, 51Jog Setup Using the Control Terminal Strip, 113Jog Setup Using the EOI, 113Jog Stop Control, 114Jump Frequencies, 58Jump Frequency #1, 114Jump Frequency #1 Bandwidth, 114Jump Frequency #2, 114Jump Frequency #2 Bandwidth, 114Jump Frequency #3, 115Jump Frequency #3 Bandwidth, 115Jump Frequency Processing, 115

LL1/R, 21L2/S, 21L3/T, 21LCD Display, 32LCD Port Connection, 56Lead Length Specifications, 22LED Option Override Multiplication Gain, 173Light Load Conditions, 15Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load

Detection Time, 124Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load

Detection Time, 124Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time, 124Light-load High-speed Operation Selection, 123Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching

Lower-Limit Frequency, 124



Line Power Switching, 50, 51Link Reactor Information, 211Load Drooping, 185Load End Short Circuit, 185Load Inertia (Acc/Dec Torque), 123Load Sharing Gain Input, 137Load Torque Filter (Acc/Dec Torque), 123Load-produced Negative Torque, 16Local Remote Key, 48Local|Remote Key, 32Lockout, 49LOD Boost Time, 174LOD Control and Stopping Method, 174LOD Feedback Level (Hz), 175LOD Restart Delay Time, 175LOD Setpoint Boost (Hz), 174LOD Start Level (Hz), 174LOD Start Time, 174Low Current, 185Low Current Settings, 53Low Current Trip, 163Low Current Trip Threshold, 163Low Current Trip Threshold Time, 163Low Output Disable, 174Low Speed Operation, 14Low Speed Signal Output Frequency, 68Lower Deviation Limits, 129Lower Limit Frequency, 36, 65

MMain Board EEPROM Fault, 185Manual Torque Limit Settings, 54Manual’s Purpose and Scope, 3maximum Carrier Frequency, 117Maximum Frequency, 64Meter Terminal Adjustment Parameters, 57Mode #1/#2 Switching Frequency, 95MOFF, 182MON/PRG, 33Monitor Mode, 46Monitor Setup, 57MOP acceleration rate, 78MOP deceleration rate, 78Motor #1 Base Frequency, 65Motor #1 Max Output Voltage, 119Motor #1 Torque Boost, 66Motor #2 Base Frequency, 86Motor #2 Max Output Voltage, 87Motor #2 Torque Boost, 87Motor #3 Base Frequency, 87Motor #3 Max Output Voltage, 88Motor #3 Torque Boost, 88

Motor #4 Base Frequency, 88Motor #4 Max Output Voltage, 89Motor #4 Torque Boost, 89Motor 150% OL Time Limit, 163Motor Braking, 16Motor Capacity, 135Motor Characteristics, 14Motor connection diagram, 21Motor Constant 1 (primary resistance), 134Motor Constant 2 (secondary resistance), 135Motor Constant 3 (exciting inductance), 135Motor Constant 3 Enable, 136Motor Constant 4 (load inertia), 135Motor Constant 5 (leakage inductance), 135Motor Counter Data, 131Motor Current Rating, 37Motor Overload, 185Motor Overload Trip, 53Motor Parameters, 57Motor Set #1, 48, 57Motor Set #2, 57Motor Set #3, 57Motor Set #4, 57Motor Settings, 57Motor Shaft Fixing Control, 111Motor Shaft Stationary Control, 112Motor Type, 136Motor/Load Combinations, 15Motorized Pot Frequency at Power Down, 72Motorized Pot Settings, 52Mounting the ASD, 19MS1 AUX, 18

NNumber of PG Input Pulses, 129Number of Poles of Motor, 135Number of Retries, 118

OOC, 182OH, 182OJ, 182OL Reduction Starting Frequency, 162OLI, 183OLM, 183OLR, 183ON Input Terminal Assignment, 72On-Trip Powerline Switching, 126OP, 183Operation (Local), 34



Operation Above 60 Hz, 15Operational and Maintenance Precautions, 10Option Fault, 186Option Type, 47Optional Devices, 212OT, 183OUT1, 23, 25OUT1 Off Delay, 85OUT1 On Delay, 84Out1 Out2 FL, 46OUT1 Output Terminal Assignment, 80OUT2, 23, 25OUT2 Off Delay, 85OUT2 On Delay, 84OUT2 Output Terminal Assignment, 80OUT4 Off Delay, 86OUT4 On Delay, 84OUT5 Off Delay, 86OUT5 On Delay, 84OUT6 Off Delay, 86OUT6 On Delay, 85OUT7 Off Delay, 86OUT7 On Delay, 85Output #4 Terminal Assignment, 80Output #5 Terminal Assignment, 81Output #6 Terminal Assignment, 81Output #7 Terminal Assignment, 81Output Current Protection Fault, 186Output Phase Loss, 186Output Phase Loss Detection, 162Output Terminal Assignments, 82Output Terminal Delays, 51Output Terminal Functions, 50Output terminal selections, 62Over Exciting Cooperation, 145Over Speed, 186Overcurrent During Acceleration, 186Overcurrent During Deceleration, 186Overcurrent During Run, 186Overcurrent Protection, 17Overcurrent Stall Level, 161Overheat, 186Overload, 53Overload Protection, 14Override Control, 55Overspeed Detection Frequency Range, 165Overtorque, 187Overtorque Detection Time, 165Overtorque Settings, 53Overtorque Trip, 164Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Negative Torque), 164Overtorque Trip/Alarm Level (Positive Torque), 164Overvoltage During Acceleration, 187Overvoltage During Deceleration, 187

Overvoltage During Run, 187Over-voltage Stall, 119Overvoltage Stall Level, 166Overvoltage Stall Level (fast), 166

PP24, 23, 25PA, 21, 119Panel Menu, 45Parity, 175Pattern #1 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #10 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 158Pattern #11 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 158Pattern #12 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 158Pattern #13 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 158Pattern #14 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 158Pattern #15 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 158Pattern #2 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #3 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #4 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #5 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #6 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #7 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #8 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern #9 Characteristics (Pattern Run), 157Pattern Run, 55, 152Pattern Run #1 Run-Time Setting, 158Pattern Run #10 Run-Time Setting, 160Pattern Run #11 Run-Time Setting, 160Pattern Run #12 Run-Time Setting, 160Pattern Run #13 Run-Time Setting, 160Pattern Run #14 Run-Time Setting, 160Pattern Run #15 Run-Time Setting, 161Pattern Run #2 Continuation Mode Run-Time

Setting, 158Pattern Run #3 Run-Time Setting, 159Pattern Run #4 Run-Time Setting, 159Pattern Run #5 Run-Time Setting, 159Pattern Run #6 Run-Time Setting, 159Pattern Run #7 Run-Time Setting, 159Pattern Run #8 Run-Time Setting, 159Pattern Run #9 Run-Time Setting, 160Pattern Run Control Parameters, 55Pattern Run Description, 152Pattern Run Setup, 152PB, 119PG Disconnect Detection, 129PG Input Phases, 129PG Input Speed Control Setup, 108PG Settings, 54PG Speed Frequency #1, 109PG Speed Frequency #2, 109



PG Speed Reference #1, 108PG Speed Reference #2, 109PG Type/Connection Error, 187Phantom Fault, 187Phase Loss, 53phase-shifting transformer, 22PID feedback, 128, 173PO, 21POFF, 183Position Completion Range, 130Position Deviation Error, 187Position Difference Limit (Droop Pulses Allowed), 167Position Loop Gain, 130Power Connections, 21Power Factor Correction, 15Power Running Torque Limit #1, 140PP, 23, 25Preferences, 48Preset Speed #1, 67Preset Speed #10, 116Preset Speed #11, 116Preset Speed #12, 116Preset Speed #13, 116Preset Speed #14, 116Preset Speed #15, 116Preset Speed #2, 67Preset Speed #3, 68Preset Speed #4, 68Preset Speed #5, 68Preset Speed #6, 68Preset Speed #7, 68Preset Speed #8, 115Preset Speed #9, 115Preset Speed Direction #1, 132Preset Speed Direction #10, 133Preset Speed Direction #11, 133Preset Speed Direction #12, 133Preset Speed Direction #13, 134Preset Speed Direction #14, 134Preset Speed Direction #15, 134Preset Speed Direction #2, 132Preset Speed Direction #3, 132Preset Speed Direction #4, 132Preset Speed Direction #5, 132Preset Speed Direction #6, 132Preset Speed Direction #7, 133Preset Speed Direction #8, 133Preset Speed Direction #9, 133Preset Speed Mode, 52, 55Preset Speeds, 51, 55Program Menu Navigation, 48Program Mode, 48Prohibit Initializing User Parameters During

Typeform Initialization, 172

Proportional (P) Gain, 128Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID), 128Protection Parameters, 52, 53PtSt, 183Pulse Width Modulation, 14PWM Carrier Frequency, 117

QQualified Personnel, 3

RR, 23, 24R Input Terminal Assignment, 72R Input Terminal Delay, 83R/F Priority Selection, 70RAM Fault, 187Reach Settings, 50Real Time Clock, 212Realtime Clock Setup, 48Reference Priority Selection, 92Regeneration Torque Limit #1, 140Regeneration Torque Limit #2, 141Regeneration Torque Limit #3, 141Regeneration Torque Limit #4, 141Regeneration Torque Limit Setting #1, 140Release After Run Timer (brake), 167Remote EOI Required Hardware, 202RES, 23, 24RES Input Terminal Assignment, 73RES Input Terminal Delay, 83Reset, 63Retry/Restart Configuration, 52Reverse Speed Limit Input, 138Reverse Speed Limit Level, 138Review Startup Screen, 49Ridethrough Mode, 118ROM Fault, 187Root menu mapping, 44Root Menus, 44Rotary Encoder, 33RR, 23, 24RR Bias Adjust, 143RR Gain Adjust, 143RR Input Speed Control Setup, 97RR Input Torque Control Setup, 97RR Speed Frequency #1, 98RR Speed Frequency #2, 98RR Speed Reference #1, 97RR Speed Reference #2, 98RR Torque Reference Setpoint #1, 98



RR Torque Reference Setpoint #2, 99RS232, 27RS232/RS485 Baud Rate, 179RS232/RS485 Communications Time Out Time, 176RS232/RS485 Communications Time-Out Action, 176RS232/RS485 Master Output, 180RS232/RS485 Response Delay Time, 179RS232/RS485 Wire Count, 179RS485, 27Run Frequency, 110Run Frequency Hysteresis, 110Run Key, 32RX, 23, 24RX Bias Adjust, 144RX Gain Adjust, 144RX Input Speed Control Setup, 100RX Input Torque Control Setup, 100RX Speed Frequency #1, 101RX Speed Frequency #2, 101RX Speed Reference #1, 100RX Speed Reference #2, 101RX Torque Reference Setpoint #1, 101RX Torque Reference Setpoint #2, 102RX2 Bias Adjust, 144RX2 Gain Adjust, 144RX2 Input Speed Control Setup, 103RX2 Input Torque Control Setup, 103RX2 Speed Frequency #1, 104RX2 Speed Frequency #2, 104RX2 Speed Reference #1, 103RX2 Speed Reference #2, 104RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #1, 104RX2 Torque Reference Setpoint #2, 105

SS1, 23, 24S1 – S4 Input Terminal Delay, 83S1 Input Terminal Assignment, 73S2, 23, 24S2 Input Terminal Assignment, 73S3, 23, 24S3 Input Terminal Assignment, 73S4, 23, 24S4 Input Terminal Assignment, 74S5 – S16 Input Terminal Delay, 83S5 Input Terminal Assignment, 74S6 Input Terminal Assignment, 74S7 Input Terminal Assignment, 75Scrolling Monitor, 44Scrolling Monitor Select, 58Service Life Information, 10Shipping Weight, 190

Short Circuit Detect Pulse, 53Short Circuit Test, 164Short Circuit Test Duration, 164Sink/Source Setting Error, 187Soft Stall, 66Soft Stall Enable, 53Soft Start, 53Spare Parts Listing, 213S-pattern 1, 148S-pattern 2, 148S-Pattern Lower Limit Adjustment, 149S-Pattern Upper Limit Adjustment, 149Special Control Parameters, 58Special Parameters, 59Speed at Drooping Gain 0%, 122Speed at Drooping Gain 100%, 122Speed Drop Detection Frequency Range, 165Speed Limit (torque) Reference, 139Speed Limit Torque Level, 139Speed Limit Torque Range, 139Speed Limit Torque Recovery, 139Speed Loop Integral Gain, 131Speed Loop Parameter Ratio, 131Speed Loop Proportional Gain, 131Speed Reach Frequency, 69Speed Reach Frequency Tolerance, 69Speed Ref. Setpoint, 51Speeds, 55splash screen display, 28ST, 23, 24ST Input Terminal Assignment, 73ST Input Terminal Delay, 83ST Signal Selection, 70ST1, 18Stall, 52Stall Cooperation Gain at Field Weakening Zone, 145Stall Prevention During Regeneration, 142Standard Mode Settings, 48Startup and Test, 22Startup Frequency, 109Startup Wizard, 48Startup Wizard Requirements, 36Status LED, 32Stop Key, 32Stop Pattern, 173SW1, 26SW2, 26Switching Frequency of Current/Voltage Control, 146Switching Load Torque During Forward-Run, 125Switching Load Torque During Reverse-Run, 125Synchronized Torque Bias Input, 137System Grounding, 20System Integration Precautions, 8System Operation, 34



TT1/U, 21

T2/V, 21

T3/W, 21

Tension, 137

Tension Torque Bias Input, 137

Terminal Descriptions, 24

Terminal Selection Parameters, 50

Torque Boost Adjustment, 169

Torque Command, 136

Torque Command Filter, 136

Torque Command Mode, 139

Torque Control, 53

Torque Limit Group, 173

Torque Limit Mode, 141

Torque Limit Mode (Speed Dependent), 142

Torque Limit Settings, 54

Torque Proving Fault, 187

Torque Setting Parameters, 53, 54

Torque Speed Limiting, 54

Trip History, 57, 188

Trip Monitor From ASD, 189

Trip Monitor from ASD, 57, 58

Trip Record at Monitor Screen, 189

Trip Save at Power Down Enable, 161

Trip Settings, 53

Trips, 181

Trouble Shooting, 181

TTL Master Output, 177

Type Reset, 49, 63

Typeform Error, 187

UU Phase Short Circuit, 187

UC, 183

UL 1995, 190

Undervoltage Detection Time, 166

Undervoltage Stall level, 166

Undervoltage Trip, 166

Undervoltage/Ridethrough, 53

Up Key, 32

Upper Deviation Limits, 128

Upper Limit Frequency, 36, 64

Upper Limit Frequency Adjustment, 168

Use Speed Mode, 131

User Notification Codes, 184

User Notification codes, 181

Utility Parameters, 49

VV Phase Short Circuit, 187

V/f Adjustment, 59

V/f Adjustment Coefficient, 89

V/f Five Point Setting, 59

V/f Group, 172

V/f Pattern, 65

Vector Motor Model, 57

Vector Motor Model Autotune Command, 134

Vector Motor Model Slip Frequency Gain, 134

Versions, 49

VI, 23, 25

VI/II Bias Adjust, 143

VI/II Gain Adjust, 143

VI/II Input Speed Control Setup, 93

VI/II Input Torque Control Setup, 93

VI/II Speed Frequency #1, 94

VI/II Speed Frequency #2, 94

VI/II Speed Reference #1, 93

VI/II Speed Reference #2, 94

VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #1, 94

VI/II Torque Reference Setpoint #2, 95

Viewing Trip Information, 188

Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor, 36

Voltage Compensation Coefficient for Dead Time, 146

Voltage Vector Control, 145

Volts per Hertz Setting, 37

WW Phase Short Circuit, 187

Warranty Card, 4

Wizard Finish, 38


Date post:	27-Jul-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	duonganh
View:	234 times
Download:	0 times

H7 Adjustable Speed Drive Operation Manual - inverter & Plc€¦ · H7 Adjustable Speed Drive...

Documents